% \iffalse meta-comment
%
% powerdot class by Hendri Adriaens.
%
% Extract package files and create documentation:
%   Find powerdot.dtx
%   latex powerdot.dtx
%   latex powerdot.dtx
%   bibtex powerdot
%   makeindex -s gglo.ist -o powerdot.gls powerdot.glo
%   makeindex -s gind.ist -o powerdot.ind powerdot.idx
%   latex powerdot.dtx
%   latex powerdot.dtx
%
% If you also want to generate the source code documentation,
% remove \OnlyDescription from the preamble of powerdot.dtx
% prior to compiling the source.
%
% To generate style examples, do
% (after extracting powerdot-styleexample.tex):
%   latex "\def\style{default}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
%   latex "\def\style{default}\input{powerdot-styleexample}"
%   dvips -i powerdot-styleexample -o powerdot-styleexample-default.ps
% Do this for all available styles (replace `default' by any
% other style name) to generate .001 and .002 files which
% will be included by the documentation.
%
%% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
%% Copyright (C) 2005-2008 Hendri Adriaens, Chris Ellison; 2009-2021 Hendri Adriaens
%% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
%%
%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
%% The latest version of this license is in
%%   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Hendri Adriaens.
%%
%% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
%%
% \fi
%
% \iffalse
%<*batchfile>
\begingroup
\input docstrip
\keepsilent
\preamble
\endpreamble
\askforoverwritefalse
\generate{
  \file{powerdot.cls}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{powerdot}}
  \file{powerdot-default.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pddefault}}
  \file{powerdot-tycja.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdtycja}}
  \file{powerdot-ikeda.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdikeda}}
  \file{powerdot-fyma.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdfyma}}
  \file{powerdot-simple.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdsimple}}
  \file{powerdot-ciment.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdciment}}
  \file{powerdot-elcolors.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdelcolors}}
  \file{powerdot-aggie.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdaggie}}
  \file{powerdot-husky.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdhusky}}
  \file{powerdot-sailor.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdsailor}}
  \file{powerdot-upen.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdupen}}
  \file{powerdot-bframe.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdbframe}}
  \file{powerdot-horatio.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdhoratio}}
  \file{powerdot-paintings.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdpaintings}}
  \file{powerdot-klope.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdklope}}
  \file{powerdot-jefka.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdjefka}}
  \file{powerdot-pazik.sty}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdpazik}}
  \file{powerdot-styletest.tex}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdstyletest}}
  \file{powerdot-styleexample.tex}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdstyleexample}}
  \file{powerdot-example1.tex}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdexample1}}
  \file{powerdot-example2.tex}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdexample2}}
  \file{powerdot-example3.tex}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{pdexample3}}
  \file{pdpream.ble}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{preamble}}
  \file{powerdot.bib}{\from{powerdot.dtx}{bib}}
}
\endgroup
%</batchfile>
%<*driver>
\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc}
\input{pdpream.ble}
\OnlyDescription
%\EnableCrossrefs
\def\fileversion{v1.7}
\def\filedate{2021/05/19}
\begin{document}
\DocInput{powerdot.dtx}
\let\Section\section\def\section*#1{\Section*{#1}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}}
\bibliographystyle{plain}
\bibliography{powerdot}
\section*{Acknowledgements}
The author is grateful to Christopher Ellison for help with setting up the package, styles
and examples, Mael Hill\'ereau for contributing the \LyX\ layout file and
description, and Herbert Vo\ss\ for contributions and maintaining the package
from 2006 to 2012. Further, I would like to thank all style contributors
(see section~\ref{sec:styles}). Moreover, I wish to thank everyone who contributed
to this package in any other way.\\[1em]
\hspace*{\stretch{1}}
\begin{minipage}{.9\linewidth}
Ramon van den Akker, David Carlisle, Pavel \v C\'i\v zek, Darren Dale, Hans Marius
Eikseth, Alexander Grahn, Morten H\o gholm, Andr\'as Horv\'ath, Laurent Jacques, Akira
Kakuto, Uwe Kern, Kyanh, Theo Stewart, and Don P. Story.
\end{minipage}

\PrintChangesX\PrintIndexX
\end{document}
%</driver>
% \fi
%
% \changes{v1.0}{2005/09/04}{Initial release}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Fixed some small bugs}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Added \texttt{tocsecindent} and
%   \texttt{tocslideindent} options}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Added \pf{elcolors}, \pf{aggie}, \pf{husky}
%   and \pf{sailor} styles}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Changed \texttt{size\protect\equals 10}
%   to \texttt{size\protect\equals 10pt}}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Added \LyX\ layout, description and example}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Added graphical examples of styles to documentation}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Improved section title handling}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{\texttt{blackslide} options adds hyperlink
%   to slide and section titles}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Extended FAQ}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Improved \pf{tycja}, \pf{ciment} and \pf{fyma} styles}
% \changes{v1.2}{2005/10/09}{Added \pf{upen} and \pf{bframe} styles}
% \changes{v1.2}{2005/10/09}{Solved some small bugs}
% \changes{v1.2}{2005/10/09}{Simplified coding of most styles}
% \changes{v1.2}{2005/10/09}{Speeded up compilations}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Solved some small bugs}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Improved \texttt{figure} and \texttt{table} handling}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added \pf{horatio}, \pf{paintings}, \pf{klope}, \pf{jefka}
%   and \pf{pazik} styles}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added palettes feature}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added random dots feature}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added optional argument to \cs{maketitle}}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added clock feature}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Updated all styles}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added palettes to \pf{default}, \pf{fyma} and \pf{sailor} styles}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Revised docs}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Updated \LyX\ example and information}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Cleaned up options}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added possibility to create horizontal table of contents}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added logo feature}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added examples and example file}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Added two slide processing methods to do verbatim on slides easily}
% \changes{v1.4}{2005/12/10}{Moved \texttt{lf} and \texttt{rf} keys from
%   \texttt{global} to \texttt{glslide} family}
% \changes{v1.4}{2005/12/10}{Added \texttt{cf} option}
% \changes{v1.4}{2005/12/10}{Updated styles}
% \changes{v1.4}{2005/12/10}{Solved some small bugs}
% \changes{v1.4}{2005/12/10}{Moved footers out of slide box in handout mode}
% \changes{v1.4}{2005/12/10}{Added \texttt{clockformat} and \texttt{clockrefresh} keys to \texttt{global} family}
% \changes{v1.4}{2005/12/10}{\texttt{blackslide} and \texttt{emptyslide} no longer have logos or randomdots}
% \changes{v1.5}{2014/01/01}{Option \texttt{blackslide} transformed to \texttt{pauseslide}}
% \changes{v1.5}{2014/01/01}{Restored package and added changes from CTAN}
% \changes{v1.5}{2014/01/01}{Modifications to work with the latest version of pstricks}
% \changes{v1.5a}{2015/11/29}{Added requirement for \texttt{pst-ovl} to get overlays working after \texttt{pstricks} moved the code there}
% \changes{v1.5b}{2017/07/22}{Added requirement for latest \texttt{graphicx} to work with latest \texttt{dvips}}
% \changes{v1.5b}{2017/07/22}{Updated documentation with respect to handout options}
% \changes{v1.5c}{2017/08/28}{Replaced clock code by the version by Alexander Grahn to achieve compatibility with the \pf{animate} package}
% \changes{v1.6}{2021/03/25}{Replaced usage of general \texttt{@inputcheck} by package specific \texttt{pd@vrbout} to solve a bug with references}
% \changes{v1.7}{2021/05/19}{Added paper with 16:9 ratio}
%
% \CheckSum{3397}
%
% \CharacterTable
%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
%
%\title{\vspace*{-2cm}\mktitledecor The \pf{powerdot} class
%\thanks{This class can be downloaded from the CTAN mirrors:
%\texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/powerdot}. See \texttt{powerdot.dtx} for
%information on installing \pf{powerdot} into your \LaTeX\
%distribution and for the license of this class.}}
%\author{Hendri Adriaens}
%\date{\fileversion\ (\filedate)}
%\maketitle
%
%\begin{abstract}\noindent
%\pf{powerdot} is a presentation class for \LaTeX\ that allows for
%the quick and easy development of professional presentations. It
%comes with many tools that enhance presentations and aid the
%presenter. Examples are automatic overlays, personal notes and a
%handout mode. To view a presentation, DVI, PS or PDF output can be
%used. A powerful template system is available to easily develop new
%styles. A \LyX\ layout file is provided.
%\end{abstract}
%
%\begin{multicols}{2}
%[\section*{Contents}
%\setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}
%\setlength{\columnsep}{18pt}]
%\tableofcontents
%\end{multicols}
%
%\newpage
%\section{Introduction}\label{sec:intro}
%This class gives you the possibility to easily create professionally
%looking slides. The class is designed to make the development of
%presentations as simple as possible so that you can concentrate on
%the actual content instead of keeping yourself busy with technical
%details. Of course, some knowledge of \LaTeX\ is still required
%though.
%
%This class builds on and extends the \pf{prosper} class
%\cite{prosper} and the \pf{HA-prosper} package \cite{HA-prosper}.
%The \pf{HA-prosper} package was initially intended to extend
%\pf{prosper} and correct some bugs and problems of that class. As
%developments on that package progressed, it was found that
%unfortunately, not all of the problems could be overcome with the
%package. That discovery was the start of a new project set up to
%make a new class to replace the \pf{prosper} plus \pf{HA-prosper}
%combination. You're currently reading the result of that project.
%
%The remainder of this section will be devoted to giving a feel of
%what the \pf{powerdot} presentation source looks like and giving an
%overview of this documentation.
%
%The document structure of a presentation is always the same. You can
%find it in the example below.
%
%\begin{example}
% \documentclass[<class options>]{powerdot}
% \pdsetup{<presentation options>}
% \begin{document}
%   \begin{slide}{a slide}
%     Contents of the slide.
%   \end{slide}
%   \section{first section}
%   \begin{slide}[<slide options>]{another slide}
%     Contents of the slide.
%   \end{slide}
%   \begin{note}{personal note}
%     The note.
%   \end{note}
% \end{document}
%\end{example}
%
%There are several elements that define the document structure. First
%of all, the class accepts some class options that control the output
%of the class, for instance, paper type and style. These class
%options will be discussed in section~\ref{sec:classopts}. Then there
%are presentation specific options which control some of the elements
%of the presentation globally, for instance, the footers. These will
%be discussed in section~\ref{sec:pdsetup}.
%
%Once the setup has been decided on, you can use the slide
%environment to produce slides (see section~\ref{sec:slides}) and the
%note environment to produce notes that go with the slides (see
%section~\ref{sec:notes}). You can use overlays to display material
%in steps. This is described in section~\ref{sec:overlays}. The
%|\section| command provides a way to structure your presentation.
%This is discussed in section~\ref{sec:structure}.
%Section~\ref{sec:styles} will show an overview of the styles that
%come with this class and the characteristics of each style.
%Section~\ref{sec:compiling} will tell you more about how to produce
%output. This section contains important information on required
%packages.
%
%Section~\ref{sec:writestyle} is mostly interesting for people that
%want to develop their own style for this class or want to modify an
%existing style. Section~\ref{sec:lyx} explains how \LyX\
%\cite{LyXWeb} can be used to create \pf{powerdot} presentations.
%This documentation concludes with a section devoted to questions
%(section~\ref{sec:questions}), like `Where can I find examples?'. It
%also tells you where to turn to in case your questions are still not
%solved.
%
%\section{Setting up the presentation}\label{sec:setup}
%This section will describe all options that are available to control
%the output of the presentation and the looks of it.
%
%\subsection{Document class options}\label{sec:classopts} We will
%start with the class options that are typed in the |\documentclass|
%command as a comma-separated list. For each option, the preset
%value\footnote{The value that will be used when you don't use the
%option.} will be mentioned in the description. This is the value
%that will be used if you decide to not give a value to the option or
%not use the option at all.
%
%\DescribeOption{mode}
%This options controls the kind of output that we want to produce.
%The preset value is |present|.
%\begin{description}
%\item\option{mode=present}\\
%This mode is used when you want to create the actual presentation. It
%will enable overlays and transition effects. You can read more about
%overlays in section~\ref{sec:overlays}.
%\item\option{mode=print}\\
%This mode can be used when printing the slides including their visual
%markup, but without any overlay or transition effects.
%\item\option{mode=handout}\\
%This mode will produce a black and white overview of your slides that
%can be used to make personal notes on, for distribution to students,
%a personal guide during your talk, etcetera.
%\begin{description}
%\item\option{nohandoutpagebreaks}\\
%By default, the handout mode produces a document with two slides per
%page. If you want to fit more slides on a page, specify this option
%in the |\documentclass| command and \pf{powerdot} will let \LaTeX\
%decide on the places to insert a page break, namely when a page is
%full.
%\item\option{nohandoutframes}\\
%By default, the handout frames the slides. This option will remove
%the frames around slides on handouts.
%\end{description}
%\end{description}
%
%\DescribeOption{paper} This option has five possible values. The
%preset value is |screen|.
%\begin{description}
%\item\option{paper=screen}\\
%This is a special format with screen optimized ratio (4/3). The
%actual page dimensions will be 8.25 inch by 11 inch. This paper format
%is not available for print or handout mode. In these modes, \pf{powerdot}
%will switch to a4 paper and put a warning that it did this in the
%log file of your presentation.
%\item\option{paper=a4paper}\\
%A4 paper will be used for the presentation or handout.
%\item\option{paper=letterpaper}\\
%Letter size paper will be used.
%\item\option{paper=smartboard}\\
%For presentation on a smartboard (widescreen).
%\item\option{paper=169}\\
%For a presentation on a screen with 16:9 ratio.
%\end{description}
%Some important information with respect to paper size, compiling and
%viewing presentations is available in section~\ref{sec:compiling}.
%\newline
%
%\DescribeOption{orient} This controls the orientation of the
%presentation. The preset value is |landscape|.
%\begin{description}
%\item\option{orient=landscape}\\
%The presentation will be in landscape format. This value is not
%available in handout mode. In that mode, \pf{powerdot} will switch
%to portrait orientation and will warn you about this in the log
%file.
%\item\option{orient=portrait}\\ This produces slides in portrait
%format. Notice that not all styles support portrait orientation. Please
%refer to section~\ref{sec:styles} for information about which styles
%do support the portrait orientation.
%\end{description}
%
%\DescribeOption{display} This controls the production of slides and
%notes. The preset value is |slides|.
%\begin{description}
%\item\option{display=slides}\\
%This will only typeset the slides in your presentation.
%\item\option{display=slidesnotes}\\
%This will typeset both the slides and the notes in your
%presentation. See also section~\ref{sec:notes} for more information
%about notes.
%\item\option{display=notes}\\
%This will typeset the notes only.
%\end{description}
%
%Here are some more options to control the output.
%\begin{description}
%\item\DescribeOption{size}\option{size}\\
%This is the size of the normal text font in points. Possible values
%are 8pt, 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt, 14pt, 17pt and 20pt and the preset
%value is 11pt.\footnote{Note that sizes other than 10pt, 11pt and
%12pt are non-standard and it is assumed that you have the
%\pf{extsizes} bundle \cite{extsizes} installed, which provides these
%sizes.}
%\item\DescribeOption{style}\option{style}\\
%This controls the style to be loaded for the presentation. By
%default, the \pf{default} style will be loaded. For more styles, see
%section~\ref{sec:styles}.
%\item\DescribeOption{fleqn}\option{fleqn}\\
%This option makes equations flushed left. It does the same as the
%equally named option for the article class.
%\item\DescribeOption{leqno}\option{leqno}\\
%Put equation numbers at the left. Also the same as in the article
%class.
%\item\DescribeOption{nopsheader}\option{nopsheader}\\
%By default, \pf{powerdot} will write a postscript command to the ps
%file to make sure that post processors like ps2pdf know which paper
%to use without the need to specify it on the command line. See also
%section~\ref{sec:compiling}. If you experience problems with post
%processing or printing or you want to specify the paper size in the
%post processing steps yourself, use this option.
%\item\DescribeOption{hlentries}\option{hlentries}\\
%This highlights table of contents entries when the entry matches
%with the current slide and its preset value is |true|. See also
%section~\ref{sec:structure}. If you don't want highlighting of table
%of contents entries (for instance in print mode), use
%|hlentries=false|.
%\item\DescribeOption{hlsections}\option{hlsections}\\
%This highlights table of contents sections when the section matches
%with the current section in the presentation and is preset to |false|.
%See also section~\ref{sec:structure}. Specifying this
%option turns highlighting of sections on. This could be useful when
%you are using a style that implements a split table of contents.
%\item\DescribeOption{pauseslide}\option{pauseslide}\\
%This option inserts a black slide in the presentation on page 1 and
%will automatically advance to page 2 when opening the presentation
%in a PDF viewer like Acrobat (Reader). The option also inserts a
%link behind every slide or section title that brings you to the
%black slide when clicked. When you click anywhere in the black
%slide, you will go back to the originating slide. This option can be
%used to temporarily pause a presentation, for instance, to do a
%proof on the black board. Optionally, a color can be supplied, for instance,
%|pauseslide=white| to have a pause on a white screen.
%\item\DescribeOptions{clock}\option{clock}\\
%This displays a small digital clock on slides which you can use to
%check the time left for your presentation.
%\end{description}
%
%Here is an example of a |\documentclass| command.
%\begin{example}
% \documentclass[
%   size=12pt,
%   paper=screen,
%   mode=present,
%   display=slidesnotes,
%   style=tycja,
%   nohandoutpagebreaks,
%   pauseslide,
%   fleqn
% ]{powerdot}
%\end{example}
%This example sets up a presentation in \pf{tycja} style, with a black
%slide, normal size 12 points and flushed left equations.
%\begin{example}
% \documentclass[
%   size=12pt,
%   paper=letterpaper,
%   mode=handout,
%   display=slidesnotes,
%   style=tycja,
%   nohandoutpagebreaks,
%   pauseslide,
%   fleqn
% ]{powerdot}
%\end{example}
%Changing the |paper| and |mode| options, now produces a handout with
%possibly more than two slides per page due to the |nohandoutpagebreaks|
%option.
%
%\subsection{Setup options}\label{sec:pdsetup}
%\DescribeMacro{\pdsetup}
%There are several extra options that can help customizing your
%presentation. These options are not available via the
%|\documentclass| command. This has a technical reason.\footnote{The
%interested reader is referred to the section about the \pf{xkvltxp}
%package in the \pf{xkeyval} package documentation \cite{xkeyval}.}
%We distinguish two types of options. Options that can only be set
%globally (acting for the entire presentation) using the |\pdsetup|
%command and options that can be accessed both globally (via
%|\pdsetup|) and locally (via slide environments, see section~\ref{sec:slides}).
%
%\subsubsection{Global options}\label{sec:gopts}
%This section describes options that can only be used globally in the
%preamble of your presentation via the |\pdsetup| command.
%\begin{description}
%\item\DescribeOption{palette}\option{palette}\\
%This specifies the palette to be used. A palette is a set of colors
%defined by a style. To find out which palettes are defined by each
%style, see section~\ref{sec:styles}.
%\item\DescribeOption{theslide}\option{theslide}\\
%This option controls how the slide number appears on the slide. This
%is preset to the value |\arabic{slide}~/~\pageref*{lastslide}|,
%which could appear like |5/22|. Notice that the |\arabic{slide}|
%typesets the number of the current slide and that
%|\pageref*{lastslide}| typesets the number of the last
%slide.\footnote{We use the starred version of \cs{pageref} which is
%defined by \pf{hyperref} and does not create a link to the page that
%it is referring to.}
%\item\DescribeOption{thenote}\option{thenote}\\
%This is similar to the |theslide| option, but typesets the slide
%numbers of notes. The preset value is
%|note~\arabic{note}~of~slide~\arabic{slide}| and |\arabic{note}|
%here typesets the number of the current note that goes with the
%current slide. This could appear like |note 2 of slide 7|.
%\item\DescribeOption{counters}\option{counters}\\
%The |counters| option lists counters that you might want to protect
%on overlays. As material on overlays (see
%section~\ref{sec:overlays}) is processed multiple times, also
%\LaTeX\ counters, like the |equation| counter, might be increased
%too often. To avoid that your equations get different numbers on
%every overlay, use this option. The |equation|, |table|, |figure|,
%|footnote| and |mpfootnote| counters are already protected for you.
%If you use extra counters, for instance for theorems, list them in
%this option. Example:
%\begin{example}
% counters={theorem,lemma}
%\end{example}
%\item\DescribeOption{list}\option{list}\\
%This option takes a list of options that will be passed on to the
%\pf{enumitem} package that controls the layout of lists created by
%the |enumerate| and |itemize| environments. Example:
%\begin{example}
% list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
%\end{example}
%See for more information on controlling the layout of lists the
%\pf{enumitem} package \cite{enumitem}.
%\item\DescribeOptions{enumerate,itemize}\option{enumerate,itemize}\\
%As the |list| option, but only control |enumerate| and |itemize|
%environments respectively.
%\item\DescribeOption{clockformat}\option{clockformat}\\
%This option specifies the format of the clock. The format is set using
%Acrobat's |util.printd| function.\footnote{For a complete listing of
%allowable formats, consult the \textit{Acrobat JavaScript Scripting
%Reference}\cite{javascript}.} The default value is |HH:MM:ss|, which
%shows a 00-23 hour, 00-59 minute, 00-59 second clock. Example:
%\begin{example}
% clockformat=h:MM tt
%\end{example}
%The above setting will display a 1-12 hour, 00-59 minute, am/pm clock.
%That is, the clock might show |5:53 pm|.
%\item\DescribeOption{clockrefresh}\option{clockrefresh}\\
%This option should be a number which specifies how often
%the clock is refreshed in milliseconds. The default behavior is to refresh
%the clock every second. Thus, the default value is 1000. Notice, if the
%|clockformat| is such that seconds are not shown, then it makes no sense
%to update that clock every second.  A corresponding example:
%\begin{example}
% clockrefresh=60000
%\end{example}
%The interpretation of this is that the clock will be updated every minute.
%\end{description}
%
%\subsubsection{Global and local options}\label{sec:glopts}
%This section describes options that can be used both globally via
%|\pdsetup| and locally via slide environments (see section~\ref{sec:slides}).
%\begin{description}
%\item\DescribeOptions{lf,cf,rf}\option{lf,cf,rf}\\
%This determines the content of the left, center and right footers.
%These are preset to empty.
%\item\DescribeOption{trans}\option{trans}\\
%This option sets the default transition effect to be used in the
%presentation. These transition effects only work after compiling the
%presentation to PDF format. See also section~\ref{sec:compiling}.
%The following transition effects are supported: |Split|, |Blinds|,
%|Box|, |Wipe|, |Dissolve|, |Glitter| and |Replace|. When you are using
%a viewer that understands PDF 1.5, you can also use |Fly|, |Push|,
%|Cover|, |Uncover| or |Fade|. It is important to notice that most
%viewers are case sensitive, so, for instance, |box| will not work.
%
%The preset effect is |Replace| which just replaces one slide with
%another when browsing the slides. Note that some PDF viewers (like
%Acrobat Reader 5 and higher) only produce the transition effect in
%full screen mode. If you want to use a custom transition effect that
%is not listed in the list above (for instance, a wipe effect with a
%custom wipe direction), then that is possible. However,
%\pf{powerdot} will put a warning in your log file that the effect
%that you have chosen, might not work in the PDF viewer. Here is an
%example that does work.
%\begin{example}
% trans=Wipe /Di 0
%\end{example}
%In Acrobat (Reader), this wipes from left to right instead of the
%default top to bottom. For more information, see a PDF Reference
%Manual.
%\item\DescribeOption{method}\option{method}\\
%This option can be used when a slide contains special material that
%does not get treated in the `usual' way by \LaTeX. Verbatim material
%is an example of this. Possible values are |normal| (the preset value),
%|direct| and |file|. We will come back to this option in detail in
%section~\ref{sec:verbatim}.
%\item\DescribeOptions{logohook,logopos,logocmd}\option{logohook,logopos,logocmd}\\
%If |logopos| is specified, a logo defined by the value of the
%|logocmd| option will be put on slides. The position can be
%specified relative to the width and height of the slide. |{0,0}| is
%the lower left corner of the paper and |{\slidewidth,\slideheight}|
%is the upper right corner. For positioning the logo, the |\rput|
%command of \pf{pstricks} \cite{PSTricksWeb,PSTricks} is used. This
%command also allows to specify the point of the logo that should be
%positioned there. This point can be entered via the |logohook|
%option and can take the values |tl|, |t|, |tr|, |r|, |Br|, |br|,
%|b|, |bl|, |Bl|, |l|, |B| and |c|. For more information about
%|\rput|, consult the \pf{pstricks} documentation. Here is an example
%that integrates the flower of the \pf{default} style into the
%\pf{husky} style.
%\begin{example}
% \documentclass[style=husky]{powerdot}
% \pdsetup{
%   logohook=t,
%   logopos={.088\slidewidth,.99\slideheight},
%   logocmd={\includegraphics[height=.08\slideheight]{powerdot-default.ps}}
% }
% \begin{document}
% ...
% \end{document}
%\end{example}
%The preset value for |logohook| is |tl|.
%\end{description}
%
%A special feature of \pf{powerdot}, which can be used to make
%presentations come alive, is the use of random dots. These dots will
%be placed anywhere on your slides and use the colors defined by the
%palette that you use. Overlays will carry the same dots. This
%feature uses |random.tex| \cite{random}. Several options are
%available to control the appearance of the random dots.
%\begin{description}
%\item\DescribeOption{randomdots}\option{randomdots}\\
%By default, random dots are turned off. If this option is set to
%|true|, random dots will be generated. |false| will turn off the
%feature. When no value is submitted to the option, |true| will be
%used.
%\item\DescribeOptions{dmindots,dmaxdots}\option{dmindots,dmaxdots}\\
%The number of dots per slide is also random. These options set the
%minimum and maximum dots per slide. Preset values are |5| and |40|,
%respectively.
%\item\DescribeOptions{dminsize,dmaxsize}\option{dminsize,dmaxsize}\\
%The minimum and maximum radius of the dots. Preset values are |5pt|
%and |40pt|, respectively.
%\item\DescribeOptions{dminwidth,dmaxwidth,dminheight,dmaxheight}
%\option{dminwidth,dmaxwidth,dminheight,dmaxheight}\\
%These options determine the area on the slide that can be used for
%the random dots. These values are preset such that dots go anywhere
%on the slide, but you might want to adjust these such that, for
%instance, dots can only appear in the text area. The preset values
%are |0pt|, |\slidewidth|, |0pt|, |\slideheight|.
%
%Here is an example that allows dots in a smaller rectangle on the
%slide.
%\begin{example}
% \pdsetup{
%   dminwidth=.1\slidewidth,dmaxwidth=.9\slidewidth,
%   dminheight=.2\slideheight,dmaxheight=.8\slideheight
% }
%\end{example}
%\item\DescribeOption{dbright}\option{dbright}\\
%This option can be used to adjust the brightness of the dots. The
%number should be an integer between -100 and 100. If the number is
%negative, the color will be adjusted towards black, with -100 giving
%black. If the number is positive, the color will be adjusted towards
%white, with 100 giving white. With a light background, you may want
%to choose |bright| to be positive. With a dark background, you may
%want to set it negative. The preset value is |60|, meaning a mixture
%of 40\% of the original color and 60\% white.
%\item\DescribeOption{dprop}\option{dprop}\\
%This option is used for passing extra parameters to the |\psdot|
%command, which creates the random dots. You could, for instance,
%change the style of the dots or the line width. See for more
%information about |\psdot| the \pf{pstricks} documentation
%\cite{PSTricksWeb,PSTricks}. \pf{powerdot} defines two extra dot
%styles that can be used for the random dots. These styles are
%|ocircle| (open circle) and |osquare| (open square).
%\end{description}
%
%Here are two examples for the use of random dots.
%\begin{example}
% \pdsetup{
%   randomdots,dminwidth=.2\slidewidth
% }
%\end{example}
%This turns on random dots and doesn't use the left 20\% of the slide
%for placing random dots.
%\begin{example}
% \pdsetup{
%   randomdots,dprop={dotstyle=ocircle,linewidth=.5pt},
%   dminsize=500pt,dmaxsize=600pt,dmindots=2,dmaxdots=5
% }
%\end{example}
%This example puts at most 5 big circles on slides. These circles do
%not fit on the slides and you will only see parts of them in the
%shape of curves.
%
%\subsubsection{\cs{pdsetup} example}
%Here is an example of a |\pdsetup| command that one could use to set up
%the presentation.
%\begin{example}
% \pdsetup{
%   lf=My first presentation,
%   rf=For some conference,
%   trans=Wipe,
%   theslide=\arabic{slide},
%   randomdots,dmaxdots=80
% }
%\end{example}
%This sets the left and right footers and will initialize the
%transition effect to |Wipe|. Further, slide numbers will not include
%the number of the last slide, but only the number of the current
%slide. Finally, slides will be covered with at most 80 random dots.
%
%A small note is necessary with respect to the appearance of footers.
%The slide number (controlled by the |theslide| option) will be added
%to a footer. Most styles add it too the right footer. If both the
%footer and the slide number are non empty, |~--~| will be inserted
%in between them to separate them. Styles might modify this default
%behavior however.
%
%\section{Making slides}\label{sec:slides}
%\subsection{The title slide}\label{sec:titleslide}
%\DescribeMacro{\title}
%\DescribeMacro{\author}
%\DescribeMacro{\and}
%\DescribeMacro{\date}
%\DescribeMacro{\maketitle}
%The title slide is created by the |\maketitle| command.
%\begin{command}
% `\cs{maketitle}\oarg{options}'
%\end{command}
%Its use is the same as in the standard \LaTeX\ document classes. The
%optional argument \meta{options} can contain any option from
%section~\ref{sec:glopts}. Specifying such an option in the
%|\maketitle| command will only have an effect on the title slide and
%not on other slides. See an example below.
%\begin{example}
% \documentclass{powerdot}
%   \title{Title}
%   \author{You \and me}
%   \date{August 21, 2005}
% \begin{document}
%    \maketitle
%    ...
% \end{document}
%\end{example}
%The |author|, |title| and |date| declarations provide the text to be
%used when making a title page. The design of the title page is
%specific to the style in use. Notice the use of |\and| for
%separating multiple authors. See a \LaTeX\ manual \cite{companion}
%for more information on commands such as |\title| and |\author|.
%
%\subsection{Other slides}\label{sec:otherslides}
%\DescribeEnv{slide} The centerpiece of every presentation is the
%slide. In \pf{powerdot}, the content of each slide is placed in a
%|slide| environment.
%\begin{command}
% `\cs{begin}\texttt{\{slide\}}\oarg{options}\marg{slide title}'
% `\meta{body}'
% `\cs{end}\texttt{\{slide\}}'
%\end{command}
%
%In section~\ref{sec:overlays} we'll see how to give some life to the
%slides, but for now, let's look at a simple example.
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{First slide}
%   Hello World.
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%The slide environment has one required argument, namely the slide
%title. When a slide is created, the slide title is used to create an
%entry in the table of contents and in the list of bookmarks. The
%table of contents is a listing of the slides and section titles in
%the presentation that appears on each slide.
%
%The table of contents is clickable (when the presentation is
%compiled into PDF) and serves as a nice way to jump from location to
%location within the presentation. The bookmark list is only present
%when compilation is taken all the way to the PDF file format. It
%also serves as a table of contents, but this list does not appear on
%\textit{any} of the slides, but in a separate window in a PDF
%viewer. In the example above, the entries in both table contents and
%the list of bookmarks would be titled |First slide|.
%
%The \meta{options} for the |slide| environment can contain any
%option listed in section~\ref{sec:glopts}. Additionally, the
%following options can be used.
%\begin{description}
%\item\DescribeOption{toc}\option{toc}\\
%When specified, the value is used for the entry in the table of
%contents; otherwise, the slide title is used. If |toc=| is
%specified, then no entry is created.
%\item\DescribeOption{bm}\option{bm}\\
%When specified, the value is used for the bookmark entry; otherwise,
%the slide title is used. If |bm=| is specified, then no entry is
%created.
%\end{description}
%
%These optional arguments are especially useful when the title of a
%slide is extremely long or when the title contains \LaTeX\ commands
%that do not render correctly in the bookmarks.\footnote{The
%bookmarking procedure uses \cs{pdfstringdef} from the \pf{hyperref}
%package, and it can process accented characters such as \cs{"i}.}
%When specifying entries, be sure to hide special characters `|,|'
%and `|=|' between curly brackets `|{|' and `|}|'. Let's look at an
%example that uses these optional arguments.
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}[toc=,bm={LaTeX, i*i=-1}]{\color{red}\LaTeX, $i^2=-1$}
%   My slide contents.
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%
%In this example, the slide title will appear as {\color{red}\LaTeX,
%$i^2=-1$}. This text will not render correctly in a bookmark entry.
%An attempt is made to correct this, but often, the correction does
%not produce an equivalent text. This particular title would be
%rendered in the bookmark list as |redLaTeX, i2=-1|. On the other
%hand, the manually specified bookmark entry is rendered as:
%|LaTeX, i*i=-1|. Notice, no entry is created in the table of contents,
%because of the use of |toc=|.
%
%In addition to the |slide| environment, each individual style can
%define its own environments. Many styles have a |wideslide|
%environment. The idea is that one might have information that does
%not fit nicely on a slide with a table of contents listed, as this
%consumes some space. In such cases, it is preferable to use a slide
%that does not list the table of contents. The |wideslide|
%environment provides this functionality and has more space for the
%actual slide content. See section~\ref{sec:styles} for information
%on the various environments provided by the styles.
%
%\section{Overlays}\label{sec:overlays}
%It is often the case that you don't want all the information on the
%slide to appear at once. Rather, the information should appear one
%item at a time. In \pf{powerdot}, this is achieved with overlays.
%Each slide can be comprised of many overlays, and the overlays are
%displayed one at a time.
%
%\subsection{The \cs{pause} command}\label{sec:pause}
%\DescribeMacro{\pause} The easiest way to display information
%sequentially is to use the |\pause| command.
%\begin{command}
% `\cs{pause}\oarg{number}'
%\end{command}
%Below is a simple example:
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Simple overlay}
%   power\pause dot
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%The slide's information is displayed and continues until the
%|\pause| command is encountered. No further output within the same
%slide is displayed until the click of the mouse or the touch of the
%keyboard. Then, the content will continue to display until all the
%information is displayed or until another |\pause| command is
%encountered. In this example, |power| is displayed on the first
%overlay, and |powerdot| is the displayed on the second overlay.  The
%|\pause| command is often used within the |itemize| and |enumerate|
%environments. For example,
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Multiple pauses}
%   power\pause dot \pause
%   \begin{itemize}
%     \item Let me pause\ldots \pause
%     \item \ldots while I talk \pause and chew bubble gum. \pause
%     \item Perhaps you'll be persuaded.
%     \item Perhaps not.
%   \end{itemize}
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%Since |\pause| was used before the |itemize| environment, no item
%will appear until the third overlay. Then, each item will be
%displayed one at a time, each on their own overlay. More information
%on using lists will follow in the next section.
%
%The optional argument of the |\pause| command specifies the number
%of overlays to pause. An example usage is:
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Pause longer}
%   \begin{itemize}
%     \item A \pause
%     \item B \pause[2]
%     \item C
%   \end{itemize}
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%In the example above, item |C| will appear on the fourth overlay.
%The usefulness of this option will become more apparent in the next
%section; so we will revisit a similar example at that time.
%
%\subsection{List environments}\label{sec:lists}
%The list environments, |itemize| and |enumerate|, have special
%treatments in \pf{powerdot}. They have an optional argument that
%will be taken care off by the \pf{enumitem} package (see
%\cite{enumitem}). \pf{powerdot} supplies an extra key for this
%optional argument. In the examples that follow, features will be
%described using the |itemize| environment but they also apply to the
%|enumerate| environment.
%
%Here is the typical usage of the |itemize| environment:
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Basic itemize}
%   \begin{itemize}
%     \item A \pause
%     \item B \pause
%     \item C
%   \end{itemize}
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%The display is simple, each item appears one at a time with each
%overlay.
%
%\DescribeOption{type}
%Suppose we wanted every item to show, but we only wanted one item to
%appear `active' at once. This can be accomplished via the |type|
%option for the |itemize| environment. The preset value is |0|.
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Type 1 itemize}
%   \begin{itemize}[type=1]
%     \item A \pause
%     \item B \pause
%     \item C
%   \end{itemize}
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%Now, every item will be displayed in the \emph{inactive
%color}\index{inactive color|usage} (which is defined by the style
%that you use), and the item's font color will become the active one
%on the overlay that it would normally appear on. The default
%behavior is given by |type=0|. It is still possible
%to pass optional arguments to \pf{enumitem} via the second optional argument:
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Type 1 itemize}
%   \begin{enumerate}[type=1][label=\roman*a)]
%     \item A \pause
%     \item B \pause
%     \item C
%   \end{enumerate}
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%Take care, that this must always be the second optional argument! It is
%possible to leave the first one empty, which is valid only for \pf{powerdot}.
%
%Lists can also be nested to create complicated structures. When a
%list is nested, it inherits the setting of the |type| option from
%the `parent' list, but that can be overruled by specifying the
%|type| option in the optional argument of the nested list. We
%present here one example, but many more can be created by nesting
%lists of different types in different ways.
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Nested lists}
%   \begin{itemize}
%     \item A\pause
%     \begin{itemize}[type=1]
%       \item B\pause
%     \end{itemize}
%     \item C
%   \end{itemize}
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%This displays |A| and |B| on the first overlay, but |B| is inactive.
%On overlay 2, |B| will become active and on overlay 3, |C| will
%become visible.
%
%\subsection{The \cs{item} command}
%\DescribeMacro{\item}
%The |\item| command has an extra \emph{optional} argument in
%\pf{powerdot} which allows for creating overlays in a more flexible
%way then |\pause| provides.
%\begin{command}
% `\cs{item}\oarg{label}\larg{overlays}'
%\end{command}
%This optional argument should contain an overlay specification
%stating on which overlays you want the item to appear. This
%specification is a comma separated list where each item can used the
%notation as in table \ref{tab:item}.
%\begin{table}[htb]\centering
%\begin{tabular}{d}
%Syntax&Meaning\\\hline
%\texttt{x}&Only overlay \texttt{x}\\
%\texttt{-x}&All overlays up to and including \texttt{x}\\
%\texttt{x-}&All overlays from \texttt{x}, including \texttt{x}\\
%\texttt{x-y}&All overlays from \texttt{x} to \texttt{y},
%including \texttt{x} and \texttt{y}\\
%\end{tabular}
%\caption{\cs{item} and \cs{onslide} notation}\label{tab:item}
%\end{table}
%The \meta{label} argument is the standard optional argument for
%|\item| in \LaTeX. A \LaTeX\ manual \cite{companion} can tell you
%more about this argument.
%
%Here is an example.
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Active itemize}
%   \begin{itemize}[type=1]
%    \item<1> A
%    \item<2> B
%    \item<3> C
%   \end{itemize}
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%Here we have said that |A| should only be active on overlay 1, |B|
%should only be active on overlay 2, and |C| should only be active on
%overlay 3. Again, when the item is not active, it appears in the
%inactive color because of |type=1|.
%
%If |type=0| is specified and if each item is given an overlay
%option, then each item will appear only when it is active. When the
%item is not active, then it will not show on the slide at all. More
%examples demonstrating the syntax for \meta{overlays} will be
%discussed in the next section.
%
%\subsection{The \cs{onslide} command}\label{sec:onslide}
%\DescribeMacro{\onslide} Overlays can also be achieved using the
%|\onslide| command.
%\begin{command}
% `\cs{onslide}\marg{overlays}\marg{text}'
%\end{command}
%This command takes an \meta{overlays} specification as first
%argument and the \meta{text} to apply it to as second argument. The
%\meta{overlays} on which the text will appear are specified as a
%comma separated list with syntax as in table \ref{tab:item}. We
%start off with a simple example.
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Simple onslide}
%   \onslide{1,2}{power}\onslide{2}{dot}
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%We have instructed |power| to appear on overlays one and two, and
%|dot| to appear only on overlay two. As you might guess, this
%example has the same output as our first |\pause| example. Yet, it
%is clearly the case that our syntax is more complicated. However,
%this slight ``complication'' also allows for much more flexibility.
%
%\DescribeMacro{\onslide+}Consider the above example with the
%following modifications:
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Simple onslide+}
%  \texttt{onslide }: \onslide{1}{power}\onslide{2}{dot}\\
%  \texttt{onslide+}: \onslide+{1}{power}\onslide+{2}{dot}
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%The |\onslide+| command displays its content in a different manner
%altogether. Now, |dot| appears on every overlay, but it is in
%inactive color\index{inactive color|usage} and matches the normal
%font color \textit{only} on overlay two. This is comparable to the
%|type=1| behavior for lists (see section~\ref{sec:lists}).
%
%When executing this example, we will also notice that the |\onslide|
%command does hide material, but still reserves the right amount of
%space for it: on overlay 2, the |dot|s appear right above each
%other. The next command does not reserve space.
%
%\DescribeMacro{\onslide*} Instead of hiding and reserving space
%(|\onslide|) or putting \meta{text} in the inactive color
%(|\onslide+|) when the overlay doesn't match \meta{overlays}, this
%command just eats the material altogether. To understand the
%differences, consider the following example:
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Simple onslide*}
%  \texttt{onslide }: \onslide{1}{power}\onslide{2}{dot}\\
%  \texttt{onslide+}: \onslide+{1}{power}\onslide+{2}{dot}\\
%  \texttt{onslide*}: \onslide*{1}{power}\onslide*{2}{dot}
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%The output of the first two lines, we are already familiar with. The
%third line displays |power| on overlay 1 and |dot| on overlay 2, but
%no space for |power| is reserved on overlay 2. Hence |dot| will
%start on the cursor position that |power| started on overlay 1 and
%it is not aligned below the other two |dots|.
%
%We finish with an example of the syntax that is possible with
%|\item| and |\onslide|. Remember that these commands take a comma
%separated list for the \meta{overlays} specification and that each
%element can used the syntax as explained in table \ref{tab:item}.
%The various variations are demonstrated in the example below.
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Lists}
%   \onslide{10}{on overlay 10 only}\par
%   \onslide{-5}{on every overlay before and including overlay 5}\par
%   \onslide{5-}{on every overlay after  and including overlay 5}\par
%   \onslide{2-5}{on overlays 2 through 5, inclusive}\par
%   \onslide{-3,5-7,9-}{on every overlay except overlays 4 and 8}
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%
%\subsection{Relative overlays}
%Sometimes it is a pain to keep track of when an item should appear
%or become active. You might, for example, just care that some text
%appears on the overlay \textit{after} some other item. This
%functionality is provided through the use of relative overlays which
%should not be used outside list environments that use |\item|. Let's
%consider a simple, illuminating example.
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Relative overlays}
%   \begin{itemize}
%     \item A \pause
%     \item B \onslide{+1}{(visible 1 overlay after B)}\pause
%     \item C \onslide{+2-}{(appears 2 overlays after C, visible until the end)}
%     \pause
%     \item D \onslide{+1-6}{(appears 1 overlay after D, visible until overlay 6)}
%     \pause
%     \item E \pause
%     \item F \pause
%     \item G \onslide{+1-+3}{(appears 1 overlay after G for 3 overlays)}\pause
%     \item H \pause
%     \item I \pause
%     \item J \pause
%     \item K
%   \End{itemize}
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%As you can see, we still use |\onslide|. The only change is with the
%syntax of the list of overlays. Now, we can specify a `|+|' symbol
%in the list. In its simplest usage, |\onslide{+1}| will make text
%display one overlay after the overlay it would \textit{normally}
%appear on. You can still use the syntax in table \ref{tab:item}.
%These are demonstrated in the above example. Notice,
%|\onslide{+1-6}| means that the text will appear one overlay after
%the overlay it would normally appear on and that the text should
%remain shown until overlay seven. To make text appear for a range of
%relative overlays, see the final demonstration in the above example.
%
%\section{Presentation structure}\label{sec:structure}
%\subsection{Making sections}\label{sec:section}
%\DescribeMacro{\section}
%This section describes the |\section| command which provides a way
%to structure a presentation.
%\begin{command}
% `\cs{section}\oarg{options}\marg{section title}'
%\end{command}
%This command will produce a slide with \meta{section title} on it
%and will also use this text to create sections in the table of
%contents and in the bookmarks list. There are several \meta{options}
%to control its output.
%
%\DescribeOption{tocsection} This option controls the creation of a
%section in the table of contents. The preset value is |true|.
%\begin{description}
%\item\option{tocsection=true}\\
%This does create a section in the table of contents. This means that
%all following slides, until the next section, will be nested under
%this section.
%\item\option{tocsection=false}\\
%This does not create a section in the table of contents and hence
%the section will be listed as an ordinary slide.
%\item\option{tocsection=hidden}\\
%This does create a section in the table of contents, but this is
%only visible when you view a slide that is part of this section.
%This could be used to append a section to the presentation which you
%can discuss if there is some extra time.
%\end{description}
%
%\DescribeOption{slide} This option controls whether the |\section|
%command creates a slide. The preset value is |true|.
%\begin{description}
%\item\option{slide=true}\\
%A slide is created.
%\item\option{slide=false}\\
%No slide will be created. If also |tocsection| is |false|, the
%|\section| command doesn't do anything. If it does create a table of
%contents section (|tocsection=| |true| or |hidden|), its link will
%point to the first slide in the section as the section itself
%doesn't have a slide.
%\end{description}
%
%\DescribeOption{template} This option can be used to make the
%section slide with another template. By default, a normal |slide|
%environment is used to create the section slide, but if a style
%offers other templates that could be used for this purpose (for
%instance, the |wideslide| environment), then you can use this option
%to select that template. See section~\ref{sec:styles} for an
%overview of the available templates with every style.
%
%Finally, all options available to normal slides are available to
%slides created by |\section| as well (see section~\ref{sec:slides}).
%However, when the section does make a |tocsection|, |toc=| or |bm=|
%won't remove the table of contents entry or the bookmark
%respectively.
%
%\subsection{Making an overview}\label{sec:tableofcontents}
%\DescribeMacro{\tableofcontents}
%This command creates an overview of your presentation and can only
%be used on a slide.
%\begin{command}
% `\cs{tableofcontents}\oarg{options}'
%\end{command}
%There are several \meta{options} to control the output of this
%command.
%
%\DescribeOption{type}
%This option controls whether certain material (depending on the
%input in the |content| option below) will be hidden or displayed in
%the inactive color\index{inactive color|usage}. The preset value is
%|0|. Compare with the |type| option for list environments
%(section~\ref{sec:lists}).
%
%\begin{description}
%\item\option{type=0}\\
%When material is not of the requested type as specified in the
%|content| option, it will be hidden.
%\item\option{type=1}\\
%As |type=0|, but instead of hiding material, it will be typeset in
%the inactive color.
%\end{description}
%
%\DescribeOption{content}
%The |content| option controls which elements will be included in the
%overview. The preset value is |all|. The description below assumes
%that |type=0| was chosen, but the alternative text for |type=1| can
%easily be deduced.
%
%\begin{description}
%\item\option{content=all}\\
%This will display a full overview of your presentation including all
%sections and slides, except the slides in hidden sections (see
%section~\ref{sec:section}).
%\item\option{content=sections}\\
%This displays only the sections in the presentation.
%\item\option{content=currentsection}\\
%This displays the current section only.
%\item\option{content=future}\\
%This displays all content starting from the current slide.
%\item\option{content=futuresections}\\
%This displays all sections, starting from the current section.
%\end{description}
%
%We finish this section with a small example that will demonstrate
%how you can make a presentation that contains an overall overview of
%sections in the presentation, giving a general idea of the content,
%and per section a detailed overview of the slides in that section.
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}[toc=,bm=]{Overview}
%   \tableofcontents[content=sections]
% \end{slide}
% \section{First section}
% \begin{slide}[toc=,bm=]{Overview of the first section}
%   \tableofcontents[content=currentsection,type=1]
% \end{slide}
% \begin{slide}{Some slide}
% \end{slide}
% \section{Second section}
% ...
%\end{example}
%
%\section{Miscellaneous}
%\subsection{Notes}\label{sec:notes}
%\DescribeEnv{note}
%The |note| environment can be used to make personal notes that
%accompany a slide. You can control displaying notes using the
%|display| option (see section~\ref{sec:classopts}). Here is an
%example.
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Chewing gum}
% ...
% \end{slide}
% \begin{note}{Reminder for chewing gum}
%   Don't forget to mention that chewing gum is sticky.
% \end{note}
%\end{example}
%
%\subsection{Empty slides}\label{sec:emptyslides}
%\DescribeEnv{emptyslide}
%The |emptyslide| environment creates a totally empty slide. The text
%box on the slide can be used for special things like displaying
%photos. This allows for creating a dia show. Example:
%\begin{example}
% \begin{emptyslide}{}
%   \centering
%   \vspace{\stretch{1}}
%   \includegraphics[height=0.8\slideheight]{me_chewing_gum.eps}
%   \vspace{\stretch{1}}
% \end{emptyslide}
%\end{example}
%The |\includegraphics| command is defined by the \pf{graphicx}
%package \cite{graphics}. The |\stretch| command is used to
%vertically center the picture. Both commands are described in your
%favorite \LaTeX\ manual, for instance \cite{companion}. Note that
%you can use the lengths |\slideheight| and |\slidewidth| to scale
%pictures to fit nicely on the slide.
%
%\subsection{Bibliography slide}\label{sec:bib}
%\DescribeEnv{thebibliography}
%\pf{powerdot} redefines the standard \pf{article}
%|thebibliography| environment to suppress the creation of a section
%heading and running headers. All other properties are maintained.
%You can do either of the next two (depending whether you are
%using BiB\TeX\ or not):\\
%\begin{minipage}[t]{.49\linewidth}
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Slide}
%   \cite{someone}
%  \end{slide}
% \begin{slide}{References}
%   \begin{thebibliography}{1}
%   \bibitem{someone} Article of someone.
%   \end{thebibliography}
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%\end{minipage}\hfill
%\begin{minipage}[t]{.49\linewidth}
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Slide}
%   \cite{someone}
% \end{slide}
% \begin{slide}{References}
%   \bibliographystyle{plain}
%   \bibliography{YourBib}
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%\end{minipage}
%
%In case you have a big reference list that you want to spread over
%multiple slides, have a look at the packages \pf{natbib} and
%\pf{bibentry} \cite{natbib}. Using both packages allows you to do:
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{References (1)}
%   \bibliographystyle{plain}
%   \nobibliography{YourBib}
%   \bibentry{someone1}
%   \bibentry{someone2}
% \end{slide}
% \begin{slide}{References (2)}
%   \bibentry{someone3}
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%Have a look at your favorite \LaTeX\ manual for more information
%about citations and bibliographies.
%
%\subsection{Verbatim on slides}\label{sec:verbatim}\DescribeOption{verbatim}
%\pf{powerdot} has three different methods of processing slides, from
%which two have mainly been developed to make the inclusion of
%verbatim content\footnote{And other content that needs catcode
%changes when processing.} on slides easier. These methods can be
%accessed by the |method| key which is available in slide
%environments and the |\pdsetup| command (see
%section~\ref{sec:glopts}).
%\begin{description}
%\item\option{method=normal}\\
%This is the preset method for processing slides. It is fast and
%allows for overlays, but it does not allow for
%verbatim.\footnote{Except when it has been saved in a box outside
%the slide.}
%\item\option{method=direct}\\
%This method is also fast, but does not allow for overlays. Overlays
%will silently be disabled. However, it does allow for verbatim
%content on slides.
%\item\option{method=file}\\
%This method uses a temporary file to export the slide body to and
%read it back in. This method does allow for verbatim content and
%overlays, but could be slow when many slides use this method because
%the filesystem is used.
%\end{description}
%
%Below is an example demonstrating the use of all three different
%methods of slide processing.
%\begin{example}
% \documentclass{powerdot}
% \usepackage{listings}
% \lstnewenvironment{code}{%
%   \lstset{frame=single,escapeinside=`',
%   backgroundcolor=\color{yellow!20},
%   basicstyle=\footnotesize\ttfamily}
% }{}
% \begin{document}
% \begin{slide}{Slide 1}
% Normal \pause content.
% \end{slide}
% \begin{slide}[method=direct]{Slide 2}
% Steps 1 and 2:
% \begin{code}
% compute a;`\pause'
% compute b;
% \end{code}
% \end{slide}
% \begin{slide}[method=file]{Slide 3}
% Steps 1 and 2:
% \begin{code}
% compute a;`\pause'
% compute b;
% \end{code}
% \end{slide}
% \end{document}
%\end{example}
%The first slide shows the default behavior for normal content. It
%produces two overlays. The second slide does not produce overlays,
%despite the use of the |\pause| command. This command has been
%disabled by choosing the |direct| method to process the verbatim
%content. The third slide has the same body as the second slide, but
%now does create two overlays, because the method using a temporary
%file has been chosen. Notice that we used |\pause| inside the listing,
%but that it can also be used outside the listing.
%
%\subsection{The \cs{twocolumn} command}\label{sec:twocolumn}
%\DescribeMacro{\twocolumn}
%The |\twocolumn| macro allows to split content into two columns.
%\begin{command}
% `\cs{twocolumn}\oarg{options}\marg{left}\marg{right}'
%\end{command}
%This typesets \meta{left} and \meta{right} in two columns. The
%dimensions of those columns can be controlled by \meta{options}.
%Below are the available options.
%\begin{description}
%\item\DescribeOption{lineheight}\option{lineheight}\\
%If |lineheight| is specified, a line of the specified height will be
%created using |\psline| in between the two columns. Example:
%|lineheight=6cm|.
%\item\DescribeOption{lineprop}\option{lineprop}\\
%Any \pf{pstricks} declaration to specify the line properties. Example:
%\begin{example}
% lineprop={linestyle=dotted,linewidth=3pt}
%\end{example}
%\item\DescribeOptions{lfrheight,lfrprop}\option{lfrheight,lfrprop}\\
%The first creates a frame of the specified height around the left
%column. The second is as |lineprop|, but for the left frame.
%\item\DescribeOptions{rfrheight,rfrprop}\option{rfrheight,rfrprop}\\
%As |lfrheight| and |lfrprop|, but for the right frame.
%\item\DescribeOptions{lcolwidth,rcolwidth}\option{lcolwidth,rcolwidth}\\
%Width of the left and right columns. Both are preset to: |0.47\linewidth|.
%\item\DescribeOption{frsep}\option{frsep}\\
%Space between text and the frames. Preset: |1.5mm|.
%\item\DescribeOption{colsep}\option{colsep}\\
%Space between the two columns. Preset: |0.06\linewidth|.
%\item\DescribeOption{topsep}\option{topsep}\\
%The extra space (additional to |\baselineskip|) between text above
%the columns and the text within the columns. Preset: |0cm|.
%\item\DescribeOption{bottomsep}\option{bottomsep}\\
%Idem for the bottom of the columns. Preset: |0cm|.
%\item\DescribeOption{indent}\option{indent}\\
%Horizontal indent left to the left column. Preset: |0cm|.
%\end{description}
%The dimensions described above are represented graphically in
%figure \ref{fig:twocolumndim}.
%\begin{figure}[htb]
%\centering
%\begin{pspicture}(0,.5)(13,10.5)
%\psline(0,0.5)(0,10)
%\rput[tl](.05,9.95){Top}
%\psframe[dimen=middle](1,9)(7,2)
%\psline{C-C}(8.5,9)(11,9)
%\psline{C-C}(8.5,2)(8.5,9)
%\psline{C-C}(8.5,2)(11,2)
%\qdisk(1.7,8.3){.1cm}
%\psset{linestyle=dashed}
%\psline{C-C}(1.7,8.3)(6.3,8.3)
%\psline{C-C}(1.7,8.3)(1.7,3)
%\psline{C-C}(6.3,5)(6.3,8.3)
%\psline{C-C}(11,9)(12,9)
%\psline{C-C}(11,2)(12,2)
%\psline{C-C}(11,7)(12,7)
%\psline{C-C}(9.2,8.3)(12,8.3)
%\psline{C-C}(9.2,8.3)(9.2,3)
%\rput[tl](1.75,8.25){Left column text}
%\rput[tl](9.25,8.25){Right column text}
%\rput[tl](.05,1){Bottom}
%\psset{linestyle=dotted,dotsep=2pt}
%\psline(0,8.3)(1.7,8.3)
%\psline(0,9.6)(1,9.6)
%\psline(0,2)(1,2)
%\psline(0,1.1)(1,1.1)
%\psset{linestyle=solid}
%\psline{<->}(.2,8.33)(.2,9.57)
%\psline{<->}(4,8.33)(4,8.97)
%\psline{<->}(1.73,7)(6.27,7)
%\psline{<->}(1.03,6.5)(1.67,6.5)
%\psline{<->}(0.03,5.5)(1.67,5.5)
%\psline{<->}(6.33,7.4)(9.17,7.4)
%\psline{<->}(8.53,6.5)(9.17,6.5)
%\psline{<->}(6.33,6.5)(6.97,6.5)
%\psline{<->}(10.7,8.33)(10.7,8.97)
%\psline{<->}(7.3,8.97)(7.3,2.03)
%\psline{<->}(.2,1.13)(.2,1.97)
%\psline{->}(1.7,9.3)(1.7,8.45)
%\psline{<-}(9.23,7)(11,7)
%\cput(4,6.6){\small 1}
%\cput(11.1,6.6){\small 2}
%\cput(8,7){\small 3}
%\cput(7.7,3){\small 4}
%\cput(4.4,8.65){\small 5}
%\cput(1.35,6.1){\small 5}
%\cput(8.85,6.1){\small 5}
%\cput(11.1,8.65){\small 5}
%\cput(6.65,6.1){\small 5}
%\cput(0.6,8.95){\small 6}
%\cput(0.6,5.1){\small 7}
%\cput(0.6,1.55){\small 8}
%\cput(1.7,9.6){\small 9}
%\end{pspicture}
%\begin{tabular}{c p{4cm}cl}
%\multicolumn{4}{c}{Meaning of the labels}\\\hline
%1&|lcolwidth|&5&|frsep|\\
%2&|rcolwidth|&6&|topsep|\\
%3&|colsep|&7&|indent|\\
%4&|lfrheight|, |rfrheight|,&8&|bottomsep|\\
%&|lineheight|&9&Reference point
%\end{tabular}
%\caption{Two-column dimensions.}\label{fig:twocolumndim}
%\end{figure}
%Important to notice is that the |\twocolumn| macro uses the current
%cursor position as the reference point to position the first line of
%text of the left column (see also figure \ref{fig:twocolumndim}). This
%means that optional frames can extend to the text on the previous
%line. Use for instance |topsep=0.3cm| in that case to add extra
%space between the two lines of text. The preset value of |topsep|
%is based on the situation that there is no text on top of the two
%columns. In that case, it is best to locate the first line of text
%of the left column at the same spot as text that is not created by
%|\twocolumn| on other slides. The setting |topsep=0cm| does exactly
%this. However, with a combination of |topsep| and |indent| you can
%change this behavior and position the first line of text of the left
%column anywhere you want.
%
%The |\twocolumn| macro computes the height of the construction to
%position text below the construction correctly. The computation is
%done by taking the maximum height of |lfrheight|, |rfrheight|,
%|lineheight| (if specified) and the left and right column content.
%Hence when frames nor a line is requested, |bottomsep| is the
%vertical space between the lowest line of text in the columns and
%the text below the columns (additional to |\baselineskip|). Here is
%an example.
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Two columns}
%   Here are two columns.
%   \twocolumn[
%     lfrprop={linestyle=dotted,linewidth=3pt},
%     lfrheight=4cm,rfrheight=5cm,lineheight=3cm,topsep=0.3cm
%   ]{left}{right}
%   Those were two columns.
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%Note that the use of the \pf{xkeyval} commands |\savevalue| and
%|\usevalue| \index{savevalue=\verb!*+\savevalue+|usage}
%\index{usevalue=\verb!*+\usevalue+|usage} could be handy here, for
%instance for copying the properties of the left frame to the right
%frame. This avoids typing them twice and avoids making errors
%resulting in different frames. See an example below.
%\begin{example}
% \twocolumn[
%   \savevalue{lfrheight}=3cm,
%   \savevalue{lfrprop}={
%     linestyle=dotted,framearc=.2,linewidth=3pt},
%   rfrheight=\usevalue{lfrheight},
%   rfrprop=\usevalue{lfrprop}
% ]{left}{right}
%\end{example}
%See the \pf{xkeyval} documentation \cite{xkeyval} for more
%information about |\savevalue| and |\usevalue|.
%
%\section{Available styles}\label{sec:styles}
%\pf{powerdot} comes with a number of styles which are listed in the
%overview below. The characteristics of each style are described
%shortly and a sample of a title slide and a normal slide is provided
%for each style. Styles support the |wideslide| environment, have a
%table of contents on the left part of the paper in landscape
%orientation and on the bottom part in portrait orientation and
%support portrait orientation unless states otherwise.
%\begin{description}
%\item\pf{default}\\
%This style provides six different palettes. A flower in the top left
%corner decorates the slides for all palettes. The default palette is
%\texttt{blue} which has as main colors light blue and white. You can
%see an example of that palette below. Other available palettes are
%\texttt{red}, \texttt{green}, \texttt{yellow}, \texttt{brown} and
%\texttt{purple}.\\
%\styleexample{default}
%\item\pf{simple}\\
%This is a simple style in black and white. This style could be
%useful if you want to print your slides.\\
%\styleexample{simple}
%\item\pf{tycja}\\
%This style is set in shades of yellow and dark blue. The table of
%contents on slides is on the right side of the paper in landscape
%orientation and on the bottom part in portrait.\\
%\styleexample{tycja}
%\item\pf{ikeda}\\
%This style uses dark shades of red and blue and a light text color.
%It has nice patterns on the slide for decoration.\\
%\styleexample{ikeda}
%\item\pf{fyma}\\
%This style was originally created by Laurent Jacques for
%\pf{prosper}. Based on that style, he created a version for
%\pf{HA-prosper} with extended features. With his kind permission,
%this style has been converted by Shun'ichi J. Amano for
%\pf{powerdot}. The style has an elegant design with a light blue and
%white gradient background in the default \texttt{blue} palette.
%Other available palettes are \texttt{green}, \texttt{gray},
%\texttt{brown} and \texttt{orange}. It has special templates for
%sections on slides and sections on wide slides. Below is a sample of
%the blue palette.\\
%\styleexample{fyma}
%\item\pf{ciment}\\
%This style was originally created by Mathieu Goutelle for
%\pf{prosper} and \pf{HA-prosper}. With his kind permission, this style
%has been converted for \pf{powerdot}. The style has a background
%that is hatched with light gray horizontal lines. Titles and table
%of contents highlighting are done with dark red.\\
%\styleexample{ciment}
%\item\pf{elcolors}\\
%This is a style using light shades of the elementary colors red,
%blue and yellow.\\
%\styleexample{elcolors}
%\item\pf{aggie}\\
%This style was created by Jack Stalnaker for \pf{HA-prosper} and he
%has converted this style for \pf{powerdot}. The style uses dark red
%and light brown colors.\\
%\styleexample{aggie}
%\item\pf{husky}\\
%This style is created by Jack Stalnaker and has a background of
%light gray sun beams combined with dark red highlights.\\
%\styleexample{husky}
%\item\pf{sailor}\\
%This style is contributed by Mael Hill\'ereau and supplies five
%different palettes: \texttt{Sea} (the default), \texttt{River},
%\texttt{Wine}, \texttt{Chocolate} and \texttt{Cocktail}. Below is a
%sample of the palette \texttt{Sea}.\\
%\styleexample{sailor}
%\item\pf{upen}\\
%This style has a nice dark blue background and text in yellow. It is
%contributed by Piskala Upendran.\\
%\styleexample{upen}
%\item\pf{bframe}\\
%The \pf{bframe} style has blue frames on the slide in which text is
%positioned. The style is contributed by Piskala Upendran.\\
%\styleexample{bframe}
%\item\pf{horatio}\\
%The \pf{horatio} style has been contributed by Michael Lundholm and
%is a more conservative blue style.\\
%\styleexample{horatio}
%\item\pf{paintings}\\
%This is a simple style without a table of contents on slides. It has
%been contributed by Thomas Koepsell and provides 10 different
%palettes. The colors used in the palettes are drawn from famous
%paintings.\footnote{The style defines a color \texttt{pdcolor7}
%which is not used in the style but comes from the same painting and
%complements the other colors. It can be used, for example, to
%highlight text against the main background color.} If you are
%interested, open the style file to read which paintings have been
%used. The available palettes are: \texttt{Syndics} (the default),
%\texttt{Skater}, \texttt{GoldenGate}, \texttt{Lamentation},
%\texttt{HolyWood}, \texttt{Europa}, \texttt{Moitessier},
%\texttt{MayThird}, \texttt{PearlEarring} and \texttt{Charon} (all
%case sensitive). Below is a sample of the \texttt{Syndics}
%palette.\\
%\styleexample{paintings}
%\item\pf{klope}\\
%The \pf{klope} style implements a horizontal table of contents that
%only lists the sections. The style is available in the following
%palettes: \texttt{Spring}, \texttt{PastelFlower}, \texttt{BlueWater}
%and \texttt{BlackWhite}. The \texttt{Spring} palette is the default
%and you can see a sample of that below.\\
%\styleexample{klope}
%\item\pf{jefka}\\
%The \pf{jefka} style comes with four palettes: \texttt{brown} (the
%default), \texttt{seagreen}, \texttt{blue} and \texttt{white}. Below
%you see a sample of the \texttt{brown} palette.\\
%\styleexample{jefka}
%\item\pf{pazik}\\
%This style is available in two palettes: \texttt{red} and
%\texttt{brown}. Below is a sample of the default \texttt{red}
%palette.\\
%\styleexample{pazik}
%\end{description}
%
%\section{Compiling your presentation}\label{sec:compiling}
%\subsection{Dependencies}\label{sec:dependencies}
%In table \ref{tab:dependencies} is a list of packages that
%\pf{powerdot} uses to perform specific tasks. Dependencies of
%packages in this table are not listed. In the table, `required'
%means that you should have a version \emph{at least} as new as
%listed and `tested' means that \pf{powerdot} was tested with this
%version, but that it could equally well work with an older or newer
%version than the one listed in the table. So, when trying to solve
%an error, first concentrate on solving version issues for the
%`required' packages. To find out which version of a package you are
%currently using, put |\listfiles| on the first line of your
%document, run it with \LaTeX, open the |.log| file and read the file
%list (see a \LaTeX\ manual for more information). If you need to
%update a package, you can get it from CTAN \cite{CTAN}.
%\begin{table}[htb]
%\centering
%\begin{tabular}{e}
%Package/file & Version & Date & Required/tested\\\hline
%\pf{xkeyval} \cite{xkeyval} & 2.5c & 2005/07/10 & required\\
%\texttt{pstricks.sty} \cite{PSTricksWeb,PSTricks} & 0.60 & 2013/12/12 & required\\
%\pf{xcolor} \cite{xcolor} & 1.11 & 2004/05/09 & required\\
%\pf{enumitem} \cite{enumitem} & 3.5.2 & 2011/09/28 & required\\
%\pf{article} class & 1.4f & 2004/02/16 & tested\\
%\pf{geometry} \cite{geometry} & 3.2 & 2002/07/08 & tested\\
%\pf{hyperref} \cite{hyperref} & 6.74m & 2003/11/30 & tested\\
%\pf{graphicx} \cite{graphics} & 1.1a & 2017/06/01 & required\\
%\pf{verbatim} & 1.5q & 2003/08/22 & tested
%\end{tabular}
%\caption{Dependencies}\label{tab:dependencies}
%\end{table}
%
%\subsection{Creating and viewing output}\label{sec:creation}
%To compile your presentation, run it with \LaTeX. The DVI that is
%produced this way can be viewed with MiK\TeX's DVI viewer
%YAP.\footnote{Unless you are using \pf{pstricks-add} which distorts
%the coordinate system in DVI.} Unfortunately, xdvi and kdvi (kile)
%do not support all PostScript specials and hence these will display
%the presentation incorrectly. If your DVI viewer does support
%this, make sure that your DVI display settings match that of the
%presentation. In case you are using the |screen| paper, you should
%set the DVI display setting to using the letter paper format. If
%your DVI viewer allows for custom paper formats, use 8.25 inch by 11
%inch.
%
%Note that certain things that are produced with PostScript or PDF
%techniques will not work in a DVI viewer. Examples are hiding of
%material via postscript layers (as is done, for instance, by
%|\pause|, see section~\ref{sec:overlays}) and hyperlinks, for
%instance in the table of contents.
%
%If you want to produce a postscript document, run dvips over the DVI
%\emph{without any particular command line options related to
%orientation or paper size}. \pf{powerdot} will write information to
%the DVI file that helps dvips and ps2pdf (ghostscript) to create a
%proper document. If you have some reason that this does not work for
%you and you want to specify the paper and orientation yourself, you
%should use the |nopsheader| option that is described in
%section~\ref{sec:setup}. The PostScript document could, for
%instance, be used to put multiple slides on a page using the |psnup|
%utility.
%
%To create a PDF document for your presentation, run ps2pdf over the
%PS file created with dvips. Also here, you can \emph{leave out any
%command line arguments related to paper size or orientation}. If
%this is problematic for you somehow, use the |nopsheader| option as
%before and specify the paper and orientation at each intermediate
%step yourself.
%
%\section{Creating your own style}\label{sec:writestyle}
%\subsection{General information}
%Writing or customizing \pf{powerdot} styles is simple. If you want
%to modify a style or build a new one, locate the style that you want
%to use as basis in your \TeX\ tree (styles are named as
%|powerdot-<style_name>.sty|), copy that and rename it as to avoid
%license\footnote{The \LaTeX\ Public Project License requires
%renaming files when modifying them, see
%\url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl}.} or naming conflicts. You
%might want to install the new style in your local \TeX\ tree to be
%able to access it from any place on your hard drive. See your
%\LaTeX\ distribution for more information.
%
%Once that has been taken care of, we can start creating the style.
%We strongly recommend to study a style file (for example,
%|powerdot-default.sty|) while reading the remainder of this section
%as it provides good examples for the content of this section.
%
%A style has several components. We describe these components below.
%\begin{description}
%\item\textbf{Identification and packages}\\
%This identifies the package in the log of a presentation and loads
%all required packages. The \pf{default} style contains something like:
%\begin{example}
% \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
% \ProvidesPackage{powerdot-default}[2005/10/09 v1.2 default style (HA)]
% \RequirePackage{pifont}
%\end{example}
%See for more information about these commands a \LaTeX\ manual, for
%instance \cite{companion}.
%\item\textbf{Palette or color definitions}\\
%This section contains the definitions of palettes or colors that you
%want to use in the style. \pf{powerdot} uses \pf{xcolor} (via
%\pf{pstricks}). Hence, for more information about colors, see the
%\pf{xcolor} documentation. We will discuss palettes in more detail
%in section~\ref{sec:defpals}.
%\item\textbf{Template definitions}\\
%We will come back to this in sections~\ref{sec:deftemps}
%to~\ref{sec:defbg}.
%\item\textbf{Custom declarations}\\
%These can include anything that you want to be part of the style.
%The \pf{default} style, for instance, includes definitions for the labels
%in list environments like |itemize| and some initializations for
%lists in general (done with |\pdsetup|, see
%section~\ref{sec:pdsetup}). This part could also include some
%customizations as described in section~\ref{sec:specialtemps}.
%\item\textbf{Font initializations}\\
%This initializes font definitions (which can be done by
%loading a package like \pf{helvet}).
%\end{description}
%
%\subsection{Defining palettes}\label{sec:defpals}
%We will be defining templates formally in
%section~\ref{sec:deftemps}. For now, it's enough to have the general
%idea that a template controls the design of a slide. Palettes are
%sets of colors that color a template or design. A palette does not
%change the overall design of a template.
%
%\DescribeMacro{\pddefinepalettes}
%The following command can be used to define palettes for your style.
%\begin{command}
% `\cs{pddefinepalettes}\marg{name1}\marg{cmds1}\dots'
%\end{command}
%This macro takes \emph{any} even number of mandatory arguments with
%a minimum of two. For every \meta{name}, a set of \meta{commands}
%can be given which define the palette with name \meta{name}. These
%commands can define colors with names |pdcolor1|, |pdcolor2|,
%etcetera. These colors can be used when designing the template (see
%section~\ref{sec:deftemps}). |pdcolor1| will always be used as text
%color.
%
%The user can access these palettes via the |palette| key for the
%|\pdsetup| command (see section~\ref{sec:pdsetup}). If the user does
%not specify a palette, the first palette defined when compiling the
%presentation, will be used. Here is an example for defining 2
%palettes.
%\begin{example}
% \pddefinepalettes{reds}{
%   \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{1,0,0}
%   \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{1,.1,0}
%   \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{1,.2,0}
% }{greens}{
%   \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{0,1,0}
%   \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.1,1,0}
%   \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.2,1,0}
% }
%\end{example}
%In this example, the |reds| palette is the default one. For more
%information about |\definecolor|, see the documentation of the
%\pf{xcolor} package \cite{xcolor}.
%
%Notice that it is not necessary to use the names |pdcolor2|,
%|pdcolor3| etcetera as color names. But if these colors are defined,
%\pf{powerdot} will use them, for instance, in the random dots
%feature (see section~\ref{sec:glopts}). The flexibility adds extra
%possibilities in setting up templates and palettes. See for an
%example of its use, the \pf{klope} style.
%
%\subsection{Defining templates}\label{sec:deftemps}
%We start off with a definition of what a template is. A template is
%a collection of settings for slide components together with custom
%definitions, which controls the visual appearance of a slide. A
%style can contain multiple templates.
%
%\begin{command}
% `\cs{pddefinetemplate}\oarg{basis}\marg{name}\marg{options}\marg{commands}'
%\end{command}
%\DescribeMacro{\pddefinetemplate}
%This defines the environment \meta{name} to produce a slide with
%characteristics determined by \meta{basis}, \meta{options} and
%\meta{commands}. We will discuss these elements in more detail
%in the coming sections.
%
%If you want to create several templates that differ only slightly
%from each other, define a \meta{basis} template, and then use it to
%define other templates. All \meta{options} and \meta{commands} for
%the new template \meta{name} will be appended to the existing list
%of \meta{options} and \meta{commands} from the \meta{basis}
%template.
%
%Make sure you choose a \emph{proper} name for the template, and
%avoid redefining existing templates or environments. \pf{powerdot}
%defines |pauseslide|, |note| and |emptyslide| internally, so you
%shouldn't use these names unless you know what you're doing.
%Furthermore, each style needs to define at least the templates
%|slide| and |titleslide|. The |titleslide| environment will be used
%to create the title slide and |slide| will (by default) also be used
%to create section slides. Titles and sections are a bit special in
%the way they use the \meta{options} and will be discussed in more
%detail in section~\ref{sec:specialtemps}.
%
%\subsection{Controlling setup}
%\DescribeOption{ifsetup}
%The \meta{options} (keys) are described in the following sections.
%You can control how these options apply to the various setups by
%using the |ifsetup| key. Any key appearing before the first
%|ifsetup| declaration in \meta{options} will apply to every possible
%setup. Once the |ifsetup| key is used, then all subsequent key
%declarations will apply \textit{only} to the setups declared in the
%|ifsetup| key. The |ifsetup| key can be used multiple times.
%
%By possible setups, we mean the allowed values of the |mode|,
%|paper|, |orient|, and |display| keys that are described in
%section~\ref{sec:classopts}. If a value (or values!) for any of
%these four keys is not specified in a |ifsetup| declaration, then
%all subsequent key declarations will apply to any layout of that
%type. Consider the following as an example.
%\begin{example}[numbers=left,numberstyle=\tiny\ttfamily,%
%  escapeinside=`',numbersep=1em,xleftmargin=1em]
% ...
% textpos={.2\slidewidth,.3\slideheight},%
% ifsetup={portrait,screen},%
% textpos={.3\slidewidth,.2\slideheight}%
% ...
% ifsetup=landscape,%
% ...
% ifsetup,
% ...
%\end{example}
%Assuming there was no |ifsetup| declaration before the first
%|textpos| declaration, this first |textpos| will apply to every
%possible setup. However, for the screen format in portrait
%orientation, the next |textpos| declaration will be used. In fact,
%all declarations that appear until we switch to the next |ifsetup|
%(which specifies all paper sorts and only landscape orientation)
%will be used in the portrait screen layout. All keys after the next
%|ifsetup| declaration will be used in landscape orientation,
%\emph{with any paper, mode and display}. If, after declaring some
%specializations, you want to switch back to settings that apply to
%all possible setups, set |ifsetup| to empty as is done in the
%example. All subsequent declarations will then again be applied
%under any setup.
%
%The following command is a stand-alone implementation of the
%mechanism described above. It allows you to control the setup
%outside the \meta{options} argument of the |\pddefinetemplate|
%command.
%\begin{command}
% `\cs{pdifsetup}\marg{desired}\marg{true}\marg{false}'
%\end{command}
%\DescribeMacro{\pdifsetup}
%This macro executes \meta{true} when the setup that the user chose
%matches with the \meta{desired} setup, \meta{false} in all other cases.
%For instance, if the user has chosen landscape, then
%\begin{example}
% \pdifsetup{landscape}{yes}{no}
%\end{example}
%will typeset |yes|. If the user would have chosen portrait instead,
%then |no| would have been typeset.
%
%This macro can be used to check setup requests from the user and,
%for instance, generate an error if a certain setup is not supported
%by your style. \pf{powerdot} provides one predefined error message
%which can be used in one of the first lines of your style.
%\begin{command}
% `\cs{pd@noportrait}'
%\end{command}
%\DescribeMacro{\pd@noportrait}
%This macro generates an error when the user requests portrait
%orientation. Notice that the handout mode only works in portrait
%orientation. This macro takes that into account and doesn't generate
%an error in the case that the user requested a handout.
%
%\subsection{Main components}\label{sec:maincomps}
%The \meta{options} control several key components of a slide. Every
%component has several properties. A key that can be used in the
%\meta{options} argument is the name of the component postfixed by
%its property that you want to control.
%
%The components |title|, |text|, |toc|, |stoc| and |ntoc| have
%properties |hook|, |pos|, |width| and |font|. Additionally, the
%|text| component has a |height| property. The components |lf|, |cf| and
%|rf| have properties |hook|, |pos|, |temp| and |font|. Hence,
%examples of valid keys are |titlefont|, |tocpos| and |lftemp|. All
%components and properties will be discussed below.
%
%Here is an overview of the components that can be controlled from
%the \meta{options} argument in |\pddefinetemplate|.
%\begin{description}
%\item\DescribeOption{title-}\option{title-}\\
%The slide title.
%\item\DescribeOption{text-}\option{text-}\\
%The main text box on the slide.
%\item\DescribeOption{toc-}\option{toc-}\\
%The (full) table of contents on a slide containing sections and
%slides.
%\item\DescribeOption{stoc-}\option{stoc-}\\
%This is a table of contents containing only the sections. See also
%|ntoc| below.
%\item\DescribeOption{ntoc-}\option{ntoc-}\\
%This is a table of contents containing only the entries for the
%active section. Together with |stoc|, this can be used to create a
%split table of contents. In a particular template, one would usually
%have a |toc|, a combination of |stoc| and |ntoc| or no table of
%contents at all.
%\item\DescribeOptions{lf-,cf-,rf-}\option{lf-,cf-,rf-}\\
%The left, center and right footers.
%\end{description}
%
%Notice that all positioning of components described above will be
%done with |\rput| from \pf{pstricks} \cite{PSTricksWeb,PSTricks}
%internally. See the \pf{pstricks} documentation for more information
%about this command. It should also be noted that all components
%(except |lf|, |cf| and |rf|) put their content in a |minipage|
%environment.
%
%Now we list all properties of the components listed above and
%describe what they mean. Remember that keys are formed by combining
%a component name and a property.
%
%\begin{description}
%\item\DescribeOption{-hook}\option{-hook}\\
%This option defines the |\rput| hook that will be used when
%positioning the item. This can be |tl|, |t|, |tr|, |r|, |Br|, |br|,
%|b|, |bl|, |Bl|, |l|, |B| and |c|. See the \pf{pstricks}
%documentation for more information.
%\item\DescribeOption{-pos}\option{-pos}\\
%This defines the position of the |hook| on the paper. The lower left
%corner of the paper is given by the point |{0,0}| and the upper right
%corner by the point |{\slidewidth,\slideheight}|. So if you want to
%position the main text box at 20\% from the left edge and 30\% from
%the top edge of the paper, you have to do the following.
%\begin{example}
% textpos={.2\slidewidth,.7\slideheight}
%\end{example}
%If the position of any component has not been specified, this
%component will not be placed on the slide. This gives an opportunity
%to design slides without footers or table of contents, for instance.
%\item\DescribeOption{-width}\option{-width}\\
%The width of the component. All component positioned by
%\pf{powerdot} will be put in a surrounding |minipage| environment.
%The |width| property determines the width of the |minipage|. Example:
%\begin{example}
% textwidth=.7\slidewidth
%\end{example}
%This property does not exist for the |lf|, |cf| and |rf| components.
%\item\DescribeOption{-height}\option{-height}\\
%This option is only available for the |text| component. In other
%words, for this property, there is only one key, namely
%|textheight|. This can be used to specify the height of the
%|minipage| used for the main text. This does not imply that users
%are restricted to this length or that \pf{powerdot} does automatic
%slide breaking. This height is only used for vertical alignments of
%material, for instance by footnotes. The preset value is
%|\slideheight|.
%\item\DescribeOption{-font}\option{-font}\\
%This will be inserted just before the text that is about to be
%typeset. This can be used to declare deviations from the main text
%font and color. It can be a font declaration, like
%|\large\bfseries|, but can also contain other things like
%|\color{red}| or |\raggedright|.
%\item\DescribeOption{-temp}\option{-temp}\\
%This property is only available for the footers (|lf|, |cf| and |rf|) and
%can be used to change the template of the footers. This means that
%you can, for instance, add content to the footer, besides the
%content specified by the user. The default declaration by
%\pf{powerdot} is the following.
%\begin{example}
% rftemp=\pd@@rf\ifx\pd@@rf\@empty
%   \else\ifx\theslide\@empty\else\ -- \fi\fi\theslide
%\end{example}
%Here |\pd@@rf| will contain the content of the right footer defined
%by the user via the |\pdsetup| command. Similarly, |\pd@@lf|
%contains the content of the left footer. The above declaration
%checks whether the footer and |\theslide| are both non-empty and if
%so, it inserts | -- | to separate both.
%\item\DescribeOption{-orient}\option{-orient}\\
%This property is only available for the |toc|, |stoc| and |ntoc|
%components. This property can be |h| or |v| and determines the
%orientation of the table of contents. The preset is |v|. See
%also section~\ref{sec:slidetoc} for more information about the
%construction of the table of contents.
%\end{description}
%
%\subsection{Slide toc}\label{sec:slidetoc}
%The small table of contents that is placed on slides can be
%controlled by four macros and several options.
%
%\DescribeMacro{\pd@tocslide}
%\DescribeMacro{\pd@tocsection}
%These macros take one argument. When building the table of contents,
%\pf{powerdot} first passes the content through |\pd@tocslide| or
%|\pd@tocsection|, depending on the type of entry that it is building
%at that moment. You could, for instance, do
%\begin{example}
% \def\pd@tocslide#1{$\bullet$\ #1}
% \def\pd@tocsection#1{#1}
%\end{example}
%which will prefix all normal entries (not the sections) with a
%bullet. By default, these two macros are defined to just pass on
%their argument.
%
%\DescribeMacro{\pd@tocdisplay}
%\DescribeMacro{\pd@tochighlight}
%These two macros also take one argument. After processing an entry
%with the command |\pd@tocslide| or |\pd@tocsection|, \pf{powerdot}
%continues building the entry by passing it through |\pd@tocdisplay|,
%when the entry needs to be displayed only, or |\pd@tochighlight|,
%when the entry needs to be highlighted. These macros are a little
%more involved and take care of putting the content in the proper
%font and color in a |minipage|. Further, |\pd@tochighlight| also
%puts a box around the item.
%
%Notice, that by default, both the separate table of contents entries
%as well as the table of contents as a whole are typeset in
%|minipage| environments by these macros, in case the table of
%contents is vertical. The |-width| properties then determines the
%width of the table of contents and, together with |tocsecindent| and
%|tocslideindent| (see below) the width of the individual entries. If
%it is horizontal, only the separate entries will be in |minipage|s
%and the table of contents itself not and the |-width| properties
%determine only the width of the individual entries (together with
%|tocsecindent| and |tocslideindent|).
%
%Several aspects of the process of generating the table of contents
%can be controlled via the keys that are available in the
%|\pddefinetemplate| command that will be described below. If these
%keys do not provide enough handles to do what you want, you might
%need to have a look at the two macros in the source and decide to
%rewrite them in your style as to fit your needs. An example can be
%found in the \pf{fyma} style.
%
%\begin{description}
%\item\DescribeOption{tocfrsep}\option{tocfrsep}\\
%This length is the distance between the box around the content
%created by the |minipage| and the highlight frame box created by
%|\pd@tochighlight|. Preset: |0.5mm|.
%\item\DescribeOption{tocsecsep}\option{tocsecsep}\\
%The distance inserted before a section (unless it is the
%first element in the table of contents). Preset: |2ex|.
%Notice that if the orientation of the table of contents is set to
%vertical, this length creates a vertical skip, otherwise, it creates
%a horizontal skip.
%\item\DescribeOption{tocslidesep}\option{tocslidesep}\\
%The distance inserted before other entries (unless it is the
%first element in the table of contents). Preset: |0ex|. Like
%|tocsecsep|, the effect of this length depends on the orientation of
%the table of contents.
%\item\DescribeOption{tocsecindent}\option{tocsecindent}\\
%The horizontal space left to a section entry. Preset: |0pt|.
%\item\DescribeOption{tocslideindent}\option{tocslideindent}\\
%The horizontal space left to a slide entry. The horizontal skip will
%not be inserted left to slide entries that appear before the first
%section. Preset: |0pt|.
%\item\DescribeOption{tocsecm}\option{tocsecm}\\
%This is inserted just before typesetting a section. This can be used
%to mark a section, for instance with a line as in the \pf{default}
%style. Preset: empty.
%\item\DescribeOption{toctcolor}\option{toctcolor}\\
%This is the text color used for non-highlighted elements in the
%table of contents. Preset: |black|.
%\item\DescribeOption{tochltcolor}\option{tochltcolor}\\
%This is the text color used for highlighted elements in the table of
%contents. Preset: |white|.
%\item\DescribeOption{tochlcolor}\option{tochlcolor}\\
%This is the color used for the frame behind highlighted elements.
%Preset: |black|.
%\end{description}
%
%\subsection{Miscellaneous options}\label{sec:miscoptions}
%There are some options that fall outside of the scope of the previous
%sections. These will be discussed here.
%
%\begin{description}
%\item\DescribeOption{iacolor}\option{iacolor}\\
%The |iacolor| option can be used to specify the color that is used
%for inactive things, produced for instance by |\onslide|, |\pause|
%(see section~\ref{sec:overlays}) and |\tableofcontents| (see
%section~\ref{sec:tableofcontents}). As \pf{xcolor} is used by
%\pf{powerdot}, one can use special notation here, like
%\begin{example}
% iacolor=black!20
%\end{example}
%The preset value for this key is |lightgray|.
%\end{description}
%
%The following options control the digital clock (see
%section~\ref{sec:classopts}). The clock is a form text field with
%dynamic content, driven by a javascript via \pf{hyperref} text
%fields. Some options for the clock work similarly as for, for
%instance, the title component, but there are also special options.
%\begin{description}
%\item\DescribeOptions{clockhook,clockpos}\option{clockhook,clockpos}\\
%These work in the same way as the |-hook| and |-pos| properties
%discussed in section~\ref{sec:maincomps}. The preset value of
%|clockhook| is |tr|.
%\item\DescribeOptions{clockwidth,clockheight}\option{clockwidth,clockheight}\\
%These control the width and height of the text field containing the
%clock. Preset values come from \pf{hyperref} and are |3cm| and
%|\baselineskip|, respectively.
%\item\DescribeOption{clockcharsize}\option{clockcharsize}\\
%The size of characters of the clock. Preset: |14pt|.
%\item\DescribeOption{clockalign}\option{clockalign}\\
%The alignment of the clock in the text field. |0| is left-aligned,
%|1| is centered and |2| is right aligned. Preset is |2|.
%\item\DescribeOption{clockcolor}\option{clockcolor}\\
%This determines the text color of the clock. The value should be a
%named color. The preset value is |black|.
%\end{description}
%
%\subsection{Template presets}
%Below, we have copied the preset setting for the keys described
%above. These will be used if you didn't supply other input for these
%keys in a particular template. If the preset value meets your
%needs, you don't have to specify it again in your style.
%\begin{example}
% titlehook=Bl,titlepos=,titlewidth=\slidewidth,
% titlefont=\raggedright,texthook=tl,textpos=,
% textwidth=\slidewidth,textfont=\raggedright,
% textheight=\slideheight,
% tochook=tl,tocpos=,tocwidth=.2\slidewidth,
% tocfont=\tiny\raggedright,
% stochook=tl,stocpos=,stocwidth=.2\slidewidth,
% stocfont=\tiny\raggedright,
% ntochook=tl,ntocpos=,ntocwidth=.2\slidewidth,
% ntocfont=\tiny\raggedright,
% tocorient=v,stocorient=v,ntocorient=v,
% tocfrsep=.5mm,tocsecsep=2ex,tocslidesep=0ex,
% tocsecm=,toctcolor=black,tochlcolor=black,tochltcolor=white,
% tocsecindent=0pt,tocslideindent=0pt,
% lfhook=Bl,lfpos=,lffont=\scriptsize,lftemp=\pd@@lf,
% cfhook=B,cfpos=,cffont=\scriptsize,cftemp=\pd@@cf,
% rfhook=Br,rfpos=,rffont=\scriptsize,rftemp=\pd@@rf\ifx\pd@@rf
%   \@empty\else\ifx\theslide\@empty\else\ -- \fi\fi\theslide,
% iacolor=lightgray,
% clockhook=tr,clockpos=,clockwidth=3cm,clockheight=\baselineskip,
% clockcharsize=14pt,clockalign=2,clockcolor=black
%\end{example}
%
%\subsection{The background}\label{sec:defbg}
%This leaves only one argument of the |\pddefinetemplate| macro
%undiscussed. This is the \meta{commands} argument. This argument can
%contain any code that you want to execute \textit{after} setting the
%options and \textit{before} building the slide components like the
%slide title, main text, and footers. This argument is designed to
%contain declarations that will build the background of a template
%using, for instance, \pf{pstricks}, but it can also hold other
%commands you might need for building your template.
%
%Important to notice is that these commands may not create \TeX\
%material as that might destroy the construction of the slide. So, if
%you want to place the word `Hello' in the bottom left corner of the
%slide, don't type `Hello', but make its width, height and depth
%equal to zero, for instance by using \pf{pstricks}' |\rput|.
%\begin{example}
% \rput[bl](0,0){Hello}
%\end{example}
%
%\subsection{Title slide, titles and sections}\label{sec:specialtemps}
%As mentioned before, the style that you write needs to define at
%least the templates |slide| and |titleslide|. The latter treats some
%of the keys in a special way. Besides, a section slide is also done
%in a special way.
%
%The title slide (made with |\maketitle|) puts the title with
%author(s) and date in the main text box. This means that you have to
%supply a position for the main text box (|textpos|). It will use the
%main text font for the text (together with declarations in the
%|textfont| key) for the author(s) and the date. But it will use the
%declarations in |titlefont| for the title of the presentation. This
%is done so that title and author(s) form a coherent block and to
%make sure that long titles can push down the author(s) instead of
%overwriting it.
%
%\DescribeMacro{\pd@slidetitle}
%The |\pd@slidetitle| macro is used to typeset the slide title on
%slides. This macro is comparable to for instance |\pd@tocslide|. The
%macro takes one argument which is the slide title in the right font
%and formatting. By default, this macro just passes on the content
%for typesetting, but you could redefine this macro so do something
%with its input prior to typesetting it. An example is in the
%\pf{fyma} style which underlines the title after putting it in a
%|minipage| to support multi line titles.
%
%\DescribeMacros{\pd@title,\pd@sectiontitle}
%These macros are similar to |\pd@slidetitle| and typeset the title
%on the title slide and the title on section slides respectively. By
%default, these also pass there argument (which is the presentation
%title or section title), but these can be redefined to do something
%with the input prior to typesetting it, just as |\pd@slidetitle|.
%
%\DescribeOptions{sectemp,widesectemp}
%The |\section| command uses (by default) the |slide| environment and
%puts the section title in the title box with font |titlefont|. If
%you want to change the default use of the |slide| environment for
%sections to, for instance, the |sectionslide| environment or any
%other especially designed section template, change the section
%template preset in your style, using
%\begin{example}
% \setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide}
%\end{example}
%This means that if the user asks for |template=slide| in the
%|\section| command, the |sectionslide| environment will be used
%silently. To avoid surprises, |sectionslide| should preferably be
%based on the |slide| environment.
%
%A similar option is available in case the user asks for
%|template=wideslide|. One could for instance do the following.
%\begin{example}
% \setkeys[pd]{section}{widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
%\end{example}
%Whenever the user requests a |wideslide| to be used for a
%|\section|, instead, the |sectionwideslide| environment will be
%used. Other input to the |template| key by the user does not get a
%special treatment.
%
%Notice that these keys are available in the |section| family of keys
%and that you cannot use them in the |\pddefinetemplate| command.
%
%\subsection{Testing the style}\label{sec:styletest}
%\pf{powerdot} has a test file that should test most of the style.
%This test file can be produced by running \LaTeX\ over
%|powerdot.dtx|. This generates |powerdot-styletest.tex| which will
%help you with the testing job. Feel free to contact us when you
%would like to contribute your style to \pf{powerdot}. See also
%section~\ref{sec:questions}.
%
%\section{Using \LyX\ for presentations}\label{sec:lyx}
%\LyX\ \cite{LyXWeb} is a WYSIWYM (What You See Is What You Mean)
%document processor based on \LaTeX. It supports standard \LaTeX\
%classes but needs special files, called layout files, in order to
%support non-standard classes such as \pf{powerdot}.
%
%To start using \LyX\ for \pf{powerdot} presentations, copy the
%layout file |powerdot.layout| to the \LyX\ layout directory. You can
%find this file in the doc tree of your \LaTeX\ installation:
%\url{texmf/doc/latex/powerdot}. If you can't find it there, download
%it from \url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/powerdot}. Once that is
%done, reconfigure \LyX\ (\texttt{Edit\LyXarrow Reconfigure} and
%restart \LyX\ afterwards). Now you can use the \pf{powerdot}
%document class as any other supported class. Go to
%\texttt{Layout\LyXarrow Document} and select \texttt{powerdot
%presentation} as document class. For more information, see the \LyX\
%documentation, which is accessible from the |Help| menu.
%
%\subsection{How to use the layout}
%The \pf{powerdot} \LyX\ layout provides some environments\footnote{Don't
%confuse these with \LaTeX\ environments.} which can be used in \LyX.
%Some of these environments (for instance |Title| or |Itemize|) are
%natural to use since they exist also in the standard document
%classes such as \pf{article}. For more information on these standard
%environments, see the \LyX\ documentation.
%
%This section will explain how to use the \pf{powerdot} specific
%environments |Slide|, |WideSlide|, |EmptySlide| and |Note|. These
%environments correspond to the \pf{powerdot} environments |slide|,
%|emptyslide|, |wideslide| and |note|.
%
%We start with a simple example. The following \LaTeX\ code
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{Slide title}
%   Slide content.
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%can be obtained using the following \LyX\ environments. The right
%column represents the text typed into the \LyX\ window and the left
%column represents the environment applied to this text).
%\begin{example}
% Slide         Slide title
% Standard      Slide content.
% EndSlide
%\end{example}
%Some remarks concerning this example.
%\begin{itemize}[leftmargin=0pt,itemsep=0pt,parsep=0pt]
%\item You can use the environment menu (under the menu bar, top-left
%corner) to change the environment applied to text.
%\item The slide title should be typed on the line of the |Slide|
%environment.
%\item |EndSlide| finishes the slide and its line is left blank.
%\end{itemize}
%
%In the \LyX\ window, the |Slide| environment (that is, the slide
%title) is displayed in magenta, the |WideSlide| style in green, the
%|EmptySlide| style in cyan and the |Note| style in red and hence
%these are easily identifiable.
%
%Here is another example.
%\begin{example}
% \begin{slide}{First slide title}
%   The first slide.
% \end{slide}
% \begin{note}{First note title}
%   The first note, concerning slide 1.
% \end{note}
% \begin{slide}{Second slide title}
%   The second slide.
% \end{slide}
%\end{example}
%This can be done in \LyX\ in the following way.
%\begin{example}
% Slide         First slide title
% Standard      The first slide.
% Note          First note title
% Standard      The first note, concerning slide 1.
% Slide         Second slide title
% Standard      The second slide.
% EndSlide
%\end{example}
%This example demonstrates that it is often sufficient to insert the
%|EndSlide| style after the last slide or note only. Only when you
%want certain material not to be part of a slide, you need to finish
%the preceding slide manually using the |EndSlide| style. Example:
%\begin{example}
% Slide         First slide title
% Standard      The first slide.
% EndSlide
% [ERT box with some material]
% Slide         Second slide title
% ...
%\end{example}
%
%Options can be passed to slide environments by using
%\texttt{Insert\LyXarrow Short title} in front of the slide title.
%The following example uses the |direct| method (see
%section~\ref{sec:verbatim}) in the short title argument (delimited by
%square brackets) to allow for a |lstlisting| environment (defined by
%the \pf{listings} package) within the slide content.
%\begin{example}
% Slide         [method=direct]Example of LaTeX source code
% Standard      Here's the \HelloWorld command:
% [ERT box:
%   \lstset{language=[LaTeX]TeX}
%   \begin{lstlisting}
%   \newcommand{\HelloWorld}{Hello World!}
%   \end{lstlisting}
% ]
% EndSlide
%\end{example}
%Note that you are not obliged to use a |verbatim| environment to
%type the |\HelloWord| text into the \LyX\ window because \LyX\
%directly supports standard verbatim.\footnote{\LyX\ translates
%special characters into their corresponding \LaTeX\ command. For
%instance, the backslash character is translated into
%\cs{textbackslash{}}. Resulting, the font is not the same as in true
%verbatim and you might want to change that via the
%\texttt{Layout\LyXarrow Character} dialog.} Consequently, the use of
%the slide processing methods |direct| and |file| is not necessary
%when you need standard verbatim, but it is necessary when doing more
%advanced things, like in the example above.
%
%\subsection{Support of syntax}
%This section lists options, commands and environments that are
%supported through the \LyX\ interface directly, without using an ERT
%box (\TeX-mode).
%
%All class options (see section~\ref{sec:classopts}) are supported
%via the \texttt{Layout\LyXarrow Document} dialog (|Layout| pane).
%Options for the |\pdsetup| command (see section~\ref{sec:setup})
%should be specified in the |Preamble| pane of the
%\texttt{Layout\LyXarrow Document} dialog.
%
%Table \ref{tab:lyxcommands} lists the \pf{powerdot} commands that
%are supported in \LyX.
%\begin{table}[htb]
%\centering
%\begin{tabular}{f}
%Command & Method in \LyX\\\hline
%\cs{title} & Use \texttt{Title} environment.\\
%\cs{author} & Use \texttt{Author} environment.\\
%\cs{date} & Use \texttt{Date} environment.\\
%\cs{maketitle} & Managed directly by \LyX.\\
%\cs{section} & Use the \texttt{Section} environment. Options to this
%command (see section~\ref{sec:section}) can be specified using
%\texttt{Insert\LyXarrow Short title} in front of the section title.\\
%\cs{tableofcontents} & Use \texttt{Insert\LyXarrow Lists \&
%TOC\LyXarrow Table of contents}. You will need an ERT box if you
%want to use the optional argument, see below.
%\end{tabular}
%\caption{Supported \pf{powerdot} commands in \LyX}\label{tab:lyxcommands}
%\end{table}
%Table \ref{tab:lyxenvs} lists the \pf{powerdot} environments that,
%besides the earlier discussed |slide|, |wideslide|, |note| and
%|emptyslide| environments, are supported in \LyX.
%\begin{table}[htb]
%\centering
%\begin{tabular}{f}
%Environment & Method in \LyX\\\hline
%\texttt{itemize} & Use \texttt{Itemize} and \texttt{ItemizeType1}
%environments. The latter will create a list with |type=1| (see
%section~\ref{sec:lists}).\\
%\texttt{enumerate} & Use \texttt{Enumerate} and
%\texttt{EnumerateType1} environments.\\
%\texttt{thebibliography} & Use \texttt{Bibliography} environment.
%\end{tabular}
%\caption{Supported \pf{powerdot} environments in \LyX}\label{tab:lyxenvs}
%\end{table}
%Table \ref{tab:lyxERT} lists commands that can only be done by using
%an ERT box (via \texttt{Insert\LyXarrow TeX}).
%\begin{table}[ht]
%\centering
%\begin{tabular}{f}
%Command & Method in \LyX\\\hline
%\cs{and} & Within \texttt{Author} environment.\\
%\cs{pause} & \\
%\cs{item} & An ERT box is only required for the optional argument,
%not mandatory for overlays specifications.\\
%\cs{onslide} & And the versions \cs{onslide+} and \cs{onslide*}.\\
%\cs{twocolumn} & \\
%\cs{tableofcontents} & Only when using the optional argument.
%\end{tabular}
%\caption{\pf{powerdot} commands needing an ERT box in \LyX}\label{tab:lyxERT}
%\end{table}
%Note that you may use the clipboard in order to repeat often used
%commands like |\pause|. Finally, table \ref{tab:lyxadd} lists
%additional commands and environments that are supported by the layout.
%\begin{table}[htb]
%\centering
%\begin{tabular}{f}
%Env./Command & Method in \LyX\\\hline
%\texttt{quote} & Use \texttt{Quote} environment.\\
%\texttt{quotation} & Use \texttt{Quotation} environment.\\
%\texttt{verse} & Use \texttt{Verse} environment.\\
%\cs{caption} & Use \texttt{Caption} environment within standard
%float environments.
%\end{tabular}
%\caption{Additional environments for \LyX}\label{tab:lyxadd}
%\end{table}
%
%\subsection{Compiling with \LyX}
%First of all, make sure that you have also read
%section~\ref{sec:compiling}. Then, in order to get a proper
%PostScript or PDF file, you have to set your \LyX\ document
%properties depending on which paper and orientation you want. When
%your \LyX\ document is open, go to the \texttt{Layout\LyXarrow
%Document} dialog. In the \texttt{Layout} pane, put the |nopsheader|,
%|orient| and |paper| keys as class options (see
%section~\ref{sec:classopts} for a description). Then, go to the
%|Paper| pane and select corresponding paper size and orientation
%(you may choose |letter| paper in the case you set |paper=screen| in
%the class options). Finally, go to the |View| (or
%\texttt{File\LyXarrow Export}) menu and select your output
%(PostScript or PDF).
%
%\subsection{Extending the layout}
%If you have created a custom style (see section~\ref{sec:writestyle})
%which defines custom templates, you may want to extend the layout
%file\footnote{The LPPL dictates to rename a file if you modify it as
%to avoid confusion.} so that these templates are also supported in
%\LyX. The explanation below assumes that you have defined a template
%called |sunnyslide|.
%
%To support this new template in \LyX, you have to use the following
%command.
%\begin{command}
% `\cs{pddefinelyxtemplate}\meta{cs}\marg{template}'
%\end{command}
%\DescribeMacro{\pddefinelyxtemplate}
%This will define the control sequence \meta{cs} such that it will
%create a slide with template \meta{template} (which has been defined
%using |\pddefinetemplate|. This new control sequence can be used in
%the layout file as follows.
%\begin{example}
% # SunnySlide environment definition
% Style SunnySlide
%   CopyStyle     Slide
%   LatexName     lyxend\lyxsunnyslide
%   Font
%     Color       Yellow
%   EndFont
%   Preamble
%     \pddefinelyxtemplate\lyxsunnyslide{sunnyslide}
%   EndPreamble
% End
%\end{example}
%Note that you must begin the |LatexName| field with |lyxend|. The
%definition of the \LyX\ template has been inserted in between
%|Preamble| and |EndPreamble| which assures that the new \LyX\
%environment will work in every presentation. After modifying the
%layout file, don't forget to restart \LyX. See for more information
%about creating \LyX\ environments, the documentation of \LyX\ in the
%|Help| menu.
%
%\section{Questions}\label{sec:questions}
%\subsection{Frequently Asked Questions}\label{sec:FAQ}
%This section is devoted to Frequently Asked Questions. Please read
%it carefully; your problem might be solved by this section.
%\begin{itemize}[leftmargin=0pt]
%\question
%Does \pf{powerdot} have example files? Where can I find them?
%\answer
%\pf{powerdot} comes with several examples that should be in the doc
%tree of your \LaTeX\ installation. More precisely:
%\url{texmf/doc/latex/powerdot}. If you can't find them there,
%download them from \url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/powerdot}
%\cite{CTAN}.
%\question I'm getting errors or unexpected output when compiling
%the simplest example!
%\answer Did you read section~\ref{sec:compiling}?
%\question I made a typo in the slide code, ran the file, got an
%error, corrected the typo and reran, but now get an error that
%doesn't go away.
%\answer Remove the |.bm| and |.toc| files and try again.
%\question |\pause| does not work in the |align|\footnote{There are
%several environments doing similar things as \texttt{align}. Another
%example is the \texttt{split} environment, but more (often from the
%\pf{amsmath} package) can cause similar trouble for \cs{pause}.}
%environment.
%\answer |align| does several tricky things, which make it impossible
%to use |\pause|. Use |\onslide| instead. See
%section~\ref{sec:onslide}.
%\question My \pf{pstricks} nodes appear on all overlays. Also: color
%doesn't seem to work with |\onslide|.
%\answer Some PostScript tricks like nodes and color do not work with
%|\onslide|. Use |\onslide*| instead. See an example below.
%\begin{example}
% \documentclass{powerdot}
% \usepackage{pst-node}
% \begin{document}
% \begin{slide}{Color}
% \onslide*{2}{\cnode(0,-5pt){2pt}{A}}
% This is {\onslide*{2-}{\color{red}} red} text.
% \onslide*{2}{\cnode(0,-5pt){2pt}{B}}
% \onslide{2}{\ncline{A}{B}}
% \end{slide}
% \end{document}
%\end{example}
%\question Do I need to edit style files to change a style a bit?
%\answer No, you do not need to edit any style file. You can change
%any part of a certain style using the |\pddefinetemplate| and
%|\pddefinepalettes| commands. Here is an example that removes the
%left and right footers from the \pf{default} style, places the slide
%number in the center footer and adds another palette.
%\begin{example}
% \documentclass{powerdot}
% \pddefinetemplate[slide]{slide}{
%   lfpos=,rfpos=,cftemp=\theslide
% }{}
% \pddefinepalettes{mypalette}{
%   \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.27,.31,.44}
%   \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.85,.85,.92}
%   \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.8,.75,.98}
% }
% \pdsetup{palette=mypalette}
% \begin{document}
% \begin{slide}{Title}
% \end{slide}
% \end{document}
%\end{example}
%See section~\ref{sec:writestyle} for more information about these
%two commands.
%\question Can I contribute to this project?
%\answer
%Certainly. If you find bugs\footnote{Make sure that you confirm that
%the bug is really caused by \pf{powerdot} and not by another package
%that you use.} or typos, please send a message to the mailinglist
%(see section~\ref{sec:mailinglist}). If you have developed your own
%style that is distinct from existing styles and would like to see it
%included in \pf{powerdot}, please inform us by private e-mail and we
%will consider your contribution. Notice that included contributions
%will fall under the overall \pf{powerdot} license and copyright
%notice, but that your name will be included in the documentation
%when you make a contribution. This is done to guarantee that we can
%adapt files if maintenance is needed.
%\question Hyperlinks in the presentation seem off by 1 page.
%\answer This might happen in particular PDF viewers when using
%|paper=smartboard| in combination with continuous view. Use page
%by page view instead.
%\end{itemize}
%
%If your question has not been answered at this point, advance to the
%next section to read where to find more answers.
%
%\subsection{Mailinglist}\label{sec:mailinglist}
%\pf{powerdot} has a mailinglist from \url{freelists.org} and has its
%website here:
%\begin{center}
%\url{http://www.freelists.org/list/powerdot}
%\end{center}
%There is a link to `List Archive'. Please search this archive before
%posting a question. Your problem might already have been solved in
%the past.
%
%If that is not the case, use the box on the page to type your e-mail
%address, choose the action `Subscribe' and click `Go!'. Then follow
%the instructions that arrive to you by e-mail. At a certain moment,
%you can login for the first time using an authorization code sent to
%you by e-mail. After logging in, you can create a password for
%future sessions using the `Main Menu' button. The other buttons
%provide you some info and options for your account.
%
%When you are all set, you can write to the list by sending an e-mail
%to
%\begin{center}
%\url{powerdot [at] freelists [dot] org}
%\end{center}
%
%When writing to the list, please keep in mind the following very
%important issues.
%\begin{enumerate}[leftmargin=0pt,itemsep=0pt,parsep=0pt]
%\item We are volunteers!
%\item Keep your questions related to \pf{powerdot}.
%\item Always supply a \emph{minimal} example demonstrating your
%problem.
%\item Don't send big files over the list.
%\end{enumerate}
%
%We hope you will enjoy this service.
%
%\section{Source code documentation}\label{sec:source}
%In case you want regenerate the package files from the source or
%want to have a look at the source code description, locate
%|powerdot.dtx|, search in the file for |\OnlyDescription| and remove
%that and do
%\begin{example}
% latex powerdot.dtx
% latex powerdot.dtx
% bibtex powerdot
% makeindex -s gglo.ist -o powerdot.gls powerdot.glo
% makeindex -s gind.ist -o powerdot.ind powerdot.idx
% latex powerdot.dtx
% latex powerdot.dtx
%\end{example}
%
%\StopEventually{}
%
%\section{Implementation}\label{sec:imple}
%\subsection{General construction}
%This section explains the general idea of the class, how paper
%dimensions are chosen and how slides are created. We start with the
%paper.
%
%This class uses the same idea as \pf{prosper} and \pf{HA-prosper},
%namely that we create a background with \pf{pstricks} and position
%text on it using |\rput| and some |minipage| environments. This is
%easier than writing a dedicated output routine that can handle all
%the material, but doesn't break pages when we don't want that. So,
%when starting to write the class, we first investigated how to deal
%with landscape slides and paper dimensions.
%
%The job of making landscape slides can be done using \pf{geometry}.
%The paper dimension was more of a problem. As \LaTeX\ doesn't have
%the huge fonts that we need for presentations, we need to scale the
%usual fonts somehow. This could be done by using unusual paper
%dimensions (as \pf{beamer} does) and hence relying on ps2pdf to cut
%off all the redundant material. But this doesn't produce a usable
%DVI or PS file. Instead, it was chosen to use DVI magnification. The
%entire slide is magnified by a factor of 2 and only the top left
%quarter of the paper is used (but you will never notice that due to
%the magnification). As we already decided to place all material in
%|minipage|s using |\rput|, we didn't need the page anymore and it
%was easiest to use \pf{geometry} to just remove the page margins
%altogether so that the bottom left corner would be |(0,0)| and the
%top right corner |(\slidewidth,\slideheight)|.
%
%One extra remark on the paper type is necessary. We found that most
%common configurations of dvips use the |A4size| code when A4
%dimensions are found. This code doesn't write an explicit PostScript
%paper command in the PS document and hence programs using this PS
%(like ps2pdf) don't know what paper to use and revert to the
%default, which is letter paper in most cases. This, of course, is
%something that we don't want and hence, \pf{powerdot} will write
%these commands to the PS itself as to guarantee proper post
%processing of the PS.
%
%Now that we made the decisions on how to create proper DVI, PS and
%PDF output, the next task was to create an easy interface to
%overlays. To avoid counting the overlays as is necessary with
%\pf{prosper}, we implemented a system that first collects the entire
%body of an environment in a macro which can be reused multiple
%times. During execution of the body, the overlay commands like
%|\onslide| will keep a record of the biggest number that they find
%and that is the number of overlays to produce. Getting the body of
%the environment is done by collecting all material up to the next
%|\end| occurrence. If that control sequence has the proper argument
%(namely the slide that we started with), then we stop scanning and
%start processing the slide. With normal use, you will not notice
%this, but when doing special tricks like hiding |\end{slide}| in a
%macro, the process will fail as it relies on finding |\end{slide}|
%in the input stream without doing expansions. Often a work around
%can be found though. Have a look for instance at how |\section|
%creates a slide.
%
%The next task was to provide a simple way to create templates. As
%the class is based on the idea of having a background with some
%material spread out over it, the template system follows this idea.
%One argument can be used to create the background, the other
%argument controls, via keys and options, several properties of the
%material that should be placed. By adding an |ifsetup| key, full
%control could be gained over the design of the template in every
%possible setup chosen by the user.
%
%The final task for the class was to fill in all the `details'. All
%the mechanisms were present, but sometimes they should not be
%active. For instance, overlays should not be created in handout
%mode. Other things to add to the class were counter protection on
%overlays, handles to the layout of the slide number, footnotes, a
%bibliography environment, empty slides, etcetera.
%
%We hope that this section has made clear a little bit what you will
%be seeing when reading the next section with coding and why we chose
%to do it this way.
%
% \subsection{The code}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*powerdot>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Identification.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesClass{powerdot}
  [2021/05/19 v1.7 powerdot presentation class (HA)]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Initializations.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifpd@overlay
\newif\ifpd@section
\newif\ifpd@ifsetup
\newif\ifpd@display
\newif\ifpd@pauseslide
\newcounter{note}
\newcounter{slide}
\newcounter{pd@pause}
\newcounter{pd@section}
\newcounter{pd@overlay}
\newcounter{pd@trivlist}
\newcounter{pd@onslidedepth}
\newbox\pd@tba
\newbox\pd@tbb
\newtoks\pd@body
\newwrite\pd@bmout
\newwrite\pd@tocout
\newwrite\pd@vrbout
\newlength\pd@frsep
\newlength\pd@colsep
\newlength\slidewidth
\newlength\slideheight
\let\pd@cursetup\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% Setup options section.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{xkeyval}[2005/07/10]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Orientation.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@choicekey*[pd]{class}{orient}[\pd@tempa\pd@orient]{%
  landscape,portrait}{\XKV@addtolist@x\pd@cursetup\pd@tempa}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Paper type.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@choicekey*[pd]{class}{paper}[\pd@tempa\pd@paper]{%
  screen,a4paper,letterpaper,smartboard,169}{\XKV@addtolist@x\pd@cursetup\pd@tempa}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Display type.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@choicekey*[pd]{class}{display}[\pd@tempa\pd@display]{%
  slides,notes,slidesnotes}{\XKV@addtolist@x\pd@cursetup\pd@tempa}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Mode.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@choicekey*[pd]{class}{mode}[\pd@tempa\pd@mode]{%
  present,print,handout}{\XKV@addtolist@x\pd@cursetup\pd@tempa}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Pause slide.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key[pd]{class}{pauseslide}[black]{%
  \pd@pauseslidetrue
  \def\pd@pauseslidecolor{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Some boolean keys.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkeys[pd]{class}[pd@@]{%
  nopsheader,hlentries,hlsections,nohandoutpagebreaks,nohandoutframes%
}[true]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Clock definitions. Contributed by Alexander Grahn.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey[pd]{class}[pd@@]{clock}[true]{%
  \ifpd@@clock
    \newcount\pd@clockcnt
    \def\pd@startclock##1##2{%
      function pdshowtime(){%
        var pdtime=new Date();%
        this.getField("pdclock.\the\pd@clockcnt").value=util.printd("##1",pdtime);%
        this.dirty=false;%
      }%
      pdshowtime();%
      var pdclock_\the\pd@clockcnt=app.setInterval("pdshowtime()",##2);%
    }%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The size and style to be used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@cmdkey[pd]{class}[pd@@]{size}{%
  \def\pd@tempa##1pt{##1}%
  \edef\pd@@size{\expandafter\pd@tempa\pd@@size}%
}
\define@cmdkey[pd]{class}[pd@@]{style}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Some usual article options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key[pd]{class}{fleqn}[]{\input{fleqn.clo}}
\define@key[pd]{class}{leqno}[]{\input{leqno.clo}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Some presets, used in case the user doesn't supply enough input.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\presetkeys[pd]{class}{%
  size=11pt,style=default,orient=landscape,paper=screen,%
  display=slides,hlentries=true,mode=present}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Process all options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProcessOptionsX[pd]<class>\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@warn}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@error}
% \marg{msg}\\
% Warnings and errors.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@warn{\ClassWarning{powerdot}}
\def\pd@error#1{\ClassError{powerdot}{#1}\@ehd}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@noportrait}
% The standard error for styles that do not support portrait orientation.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@noportrait{%
  \ifnum\pd@orient=\@ne\ifnum\pd@mode=2\else\pd@error{%
    `\pd@@style' style does not support portrait orientation
  }\fi\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Check paper for print and handout mode. No |screen| allowed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\pd@mode>0
  \ifnum\pd@paper=\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Remove erroneous input.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@expandtwoargs\@removeelement{screen}\pd@cursetup\pd@cursetup
%    \end{macrocode}
% Switch to a4paper.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \XKV@addtolist@x\pd@cursetup{a4paper}
    \def\pd@paper{1}
    \pd@warn{you can't use `screen' format for this mode;
      \MessageBreak I've switched to a4paper
    }
  \fi
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check orientation for handout mode. No |landscape| allowed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\pd@mode=2
  \newbox\pd@textbox
  \ifnum\pd@orient=\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Remove erroneous input.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@expandtwoargs\@removeelement{landscape}\pd@cursetup\pd@cursetup
%    \end{macrocode}
% Switch to portrait.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \XKV@addtolist@x\pd@cursetup{portrait}
    \def\pd@orient{1}
    \pd@warn{you can't use `landscape' for handout mode;
      \MessageBreak I've switched to portrait
    }
  \fi
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Pass paper size and orientation to \pf{geometry} package.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase\pd@paper
  \def\pd@tempa{papersize={8.25in,11in}}
\or
  \def\pd@tempa{papersize={210mm,297mm}}
\or
  \def\pd@tempa{papersize={8.5in,11in}}
\or
  \def\pd@tempa{papersize={900pt,1440pt}}
\or
  \def\pd@tempa{papersize={594pt,1056pt}}
\fi
\ifnum\pd@orient=\z@
  \edef\pd@tempa{\pd@tempa,landscape}
\else
  \edef\pd@tempa{\pd@tempa,portrait}
\fi
\PassOptionsToPackage\pd@tempa{geometry}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Load class and packages.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\LoadClass{article}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Load font size definitions. Take into account that article has
% loaded some already. This trick actually also allows bigger sizes like
% 14pt or 20pt.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\pd@tempa\newcommand
\let\newcommand\def
\input{size\pd@@size.clo}
\let\newcommand\pd@tempa
%    \end{macrocode}
% Remaining packages.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\pd@mode=2
%    \end{macrocode}
% Handout mode.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \RequirePackage[margin=2cm,includefoot]{geometry}
\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Magnify DVI by factor 2, no margins at all.
% The offset is to neutralize the |\vskip| inserted by TeX to
% go from the top of the letters to the baseline and position chars
% there. Here we don't want any offset and start at the bottom left
% corner of the paper.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \RequirePackage[mag=2000,margin=0pt,voffset=-\pd@@size pt]{geometry}
  \geometry{top=.5\paperheight}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Xe\TeX\ support. \pf{hyperref} should not set ps paper size as it doesn't do
% landscape format we don't want it to redefine internals either.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{ifxetex}
\ifxetex
  \RequirePackage[setpagesize=false,pdfstartview=Fit,
    pageanchor=false,bookmarks=false]{hyperref}[2009/12/14]
  \def\pd@pdftrans{%
    \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\pd@@trans,}{%
      ,Split,Blinds,Box,Wipe,Dissolve,Glitter,%
      Replace,Fly,Push,Cover,Uncover,Fade,}%
    \ifin@\else
      \pd@warn{Transition `\pd@@trans' might not be understood by
        your ps to pdf converter}%
    \fi
    \special{pdf:put @thispage %
      <</Trans<</S/\pd@@trans>>>>%
    }%
  }
  \def\pd@pdbookmark#1#2#3#4{%
    \pdfstringdef\pd@tempa{#4}%
    \special{pdf:outline
      \pd@pdb@@kmark{#1}%
      <<%
        /Title(\pd@tempa)%
        /A<<%
          /S/GoTo
          /D(slide.#3)%
        >>%
      >>%
    }%
  }
\else
  \RequirePackage[setpagesize=false,dvips,pdfstartview=Fit,%
    pageanchor=false,bookmarks=false]{hyperref}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% For some strange reason, it doesn't work to put the below in the above.
% So we do it here as we don't want colored borders.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{\def\@pdfborder{0 0 0}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Necessary for inserting and creating graphics. Notice: \pf{pstricks}
% needs to be loaded after \pf{graphicx} for proper |\scalebox| definition.
% We make sure that \pf{xcolor} is loaded.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage[nosetpagesize]{graphicx}[2017/06/01]
\RequirePackage{pstricks}[2013/12/12]
\RequirePackage{pst-ovl}
\RequirePackage{xcolor}[2004/05/09]
%    \end{macrocode}
% For lists and verbatim reading of slide content.
% \changes{v1.5}{2014/01/01}{Fix for latest enumitem (20110915 hv)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{enumitem}[2007/03/12]
\let\orig@enumerate\enumerate
\def\enumerate{\@ifnextchar[\enumerate@i{\enumerate@i[]}}
\def\enumerate@i[#1]{\@ifnextchar[{\enumerate@ii[#1]}{\enumerate@ii[#1][]}}
\def\enumerate@ii[#1][#2]{%
  \ifx\relax#1\relax\else\setkeys{enumitem}{#1}\fi
  \orig@enumerate[#2]%
}
\let\orig@itemize\itemize
\def\itemize{\@ifnextchar[\itemize@i{\itemize@i[]}}
\def\itemize@i[#1]{\@ifnextchar[{\itemize@ii[#1]}{\itemize@ii[#1][]}}
\def\itemize@ii[#1][#2]{%
  \ifx\relax#1\relax\else\setkeys{enumitem}{#1}\fi
  \orig@itemize[#2]%
}
\let\orig@description\description
\def\description{\@ifnextchar[\description@i{\description@i[]}}
\def\description@i[#1]{\@ifnextchar[{\description@ii[#1]}{\description@ii[#1][]}}
\def\description@ii[#1][#2]{%
  \ifx\relax#1\relax\else\setkeys{enumitem}{#1}\fi
  \orig@description[#2]%
}
\RequirePackage{verbatim}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This is needed for the implementation of the clock.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifpd@@clock
  \RequirePackage{pdfbase}
  \ExplSyntaxOn
  \let\pd@PdfAnnot\pbs_pdfannot:nnnn
  \let\pd@PdfLastAnn\pbs_pdflastann:
  \let\pd@AppendToFields\pbs_appendtofields:n
  \ExplSyntaxOff
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here are some basic properties of the slides.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\pd@mode<2
  \pagestyle{empty}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Avoid making black slide in print mode}
% No black slide in handout or print mode.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\pd@mode>0
  \pd@pauseslidefalse
\fi
\setlength\parindent{0pt}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Slide dimensions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\slidewidth{.5\paperwidth}
\setlength\slideheight{.5\paperheight}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Write landscape correction to the ps to avoid ps to be rotated by
% 180 degrees.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\pd@orient=\z@
  \special{!/landplus90 true store}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Write paper dimensions.
% The specials solve a config problem with ghostscript not picking up info from
% ps, due to the fact that some paper formats defined in config.ps do
% not write explicit ps commands. For instance, when dvips finds a4 paper dimensions,
% it writes |%%Papersize: A4|, but no ps command. So ghostscript doesn't
% find a paper size and takes it's default which could be |letter|
% in fact.
% Notice further that screen size is based on letter, but will be cropped in pdf.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifpd@@nopsheader\else
  \special{papersize=\the\paperwidth,\the\paperheight}
  \ifcase\pd@paper
    \special{!%
      \@percentchar\@percentchar BeginPaperSize: letter
      ^^Jletter^^J\@percentchar\@percentchar EndPaperSize
    }
  \or
    \special{!%
      \@percentchar\@percentchar BeginPaperSize: a4
      ^^Ja4^^J\@percentchar\@percentchar EndPaperSize
    }
  \or
    \special{!%
      \@percentchar\@percentchar BeginPaperSize: letter
      ^^Jletter^^J\@percentchar\@percentchar EndPaperSize
    }
  \fi
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Crop pdf for optimal screen ratio. This does not work in DVI or PS.
% Note, the ps rotation takes care of orientation irrespective of
% crop dimensions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase\pd@paper\def\@pdfpagescrop{0 0 594 842}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \pf{hyperref} writes this to the pdf.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@pdfcreator{LaTeX with powerdot class}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save the number of the last slide at the end of the document.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtEndDocument{%
  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\newlabel{lastslide}%
    {{}{\the\c@slide}{\relax}{}{}}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set up options. |global| is for global only keys (so to be used only
% in the preamble. |slide| is only for slides. |glslide| keys can be
% used in both locations.
% Create an interface to change the typesetting of the page numbers.
% This follows the usual \LaTeX\ idea to change typesetting of numbers
% via |\thepage| etcetera.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key[pd]{global}{theslide}{\def\theslide{#1}}
\define@key[pd]{global}{thenote}{\def\thenote{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Options to be used by \pf{enumitem}. These store input incrementally
% in macros used by \pf{enumitem} to store options. By allowing options
% to be added, both the style and the user can insert options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key[pd]{global}{enumerate}{%
  \ifx\enit@@enum\@undefined
    \def\enit@@enum{#1}%
  \else
    \XKV@addtolist@n\enit@@enum{#1}%
  \fi
}
\define@key[pd]{global}{itemize}{%
  \ifx\enit@@item\@undefined
    \def\enit@@item{#1}%
  \else
    \XKV@addtolist@n\enit@@item{#1}%
  \fi
}
\define@key[pd]{global}{list}{%
  \ifx\enit@@list\@undefined
    \def\enit@@list{#1}%
  \else
    \XKV@addtolist@n\enit@@list{#1}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Counters that need overlay protection.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key[pd]{global}{counters}{%
  \XKV@addtolist@n\pd@@counters{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Initialize the counters list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@@counters{table,figure,equation,footnote,mpfootnote}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Clock format and refresh rate.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@cmdkeys[pd]{global}[pd@@]{clockformat,clockrefresh}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Footers and transition effect.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@cmdkeys[pd]{glslide}[pd@@]{lf,cf,rf,trans}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Palettes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@cmdkey[pd]{glslide}[pd@@]{palette}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check whether the chosen palette exists. If yes, execute it, set
% |\default@color| (for equation numbers etcetera) and copy the
% current color for |\twocolumn|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifnum\pd@mode<2
    \XKV@ifundefined{pd@pe@\pd@@palette @colors}{%
      \pd@error{palette `\pd@@palette' not defined}%
    }{%
      \@nameuse{pd@pe@\pd@@palette @colors}%
      \color{pdcolor1}%
      \let\default@color\current@color
      \let\pd@color\XC@current@color
    }%
    \pd@countcolors
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Slide processing method.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@choicekey*[pd]{glslide}{method}[\pd@tempa\pd@method]{%
  normal,file,direct}{%
  \ifnum\pd@method=2
    \ifx\pd@textbox\@undefined\newbox\pd@textbox\fi
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Random dots. Load |random.tex| if necessary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey[pd]{glslide}[pd@@]{randomdots}[true]{%
  \ifx\randomi\@undefined
    \InputIfFileExists{random}{\newcount\pd@tempcnta}{%
      \global\pd@@randomdotsfalse
      \pd@warn{random.tex not found, random dots canceled}%
    }%
  \fi
  \ifnum\pd@mode=\tw@\global\pd@@randomdotsfalse\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Keys for random dots and the logo.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@cmdkeys[pd]{glslide}[pd@@]{%
  dminsize,dmaxsize,dbright,dmindots,dmaxdots,dminwidth,dmaxwidth,%
  dminheight,dmaxheight,dprop,logohook,logopos%
}
\define@key[pd]{glslide}{logocmd}{%
  \ifx\pd@logobox\@undefined\newbox\pd@logobox\fi
  \sbox\pd@logobox{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Initialize some of the keys that we just defined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setkeys[pd]{glslide,global}{%
  lf=,cf=,rf=,theslide=\arabic{slide} / \pageref*{lastslide},%
  thenote=note \arabic{note} of slide \arabic{slide},%
  trans=Replace,dminsize=5pt,dmaxsize=40pt,dminwidth=0pt,%
  dmaxwidth=\slidewidth,dminheight=0pt,dbright=60,%
  dmaxheight=\slideheight,dmindots=5,dmaxdots=40,dprop=,%
  logohook=tl,logopos=,logocmd=,method=normal,%
  clockformat=HH:MM:ss,clockrefresh=1000%
%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\pdsetup}
% The interface for users. Disable global keys |\AtBeginDocument|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pdsetup{\setkeys[pd]{global,glslide}}
\AtBeginDocument{%
  \disable@keys[pd]{global}{%
    theslide,thenote,enumerate,itemize,list,counters%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Local keys: |toc| and |bm|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@cmdkeys[pd]{slide}[pd@@]{toc,bm}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\pdifsetup}
% \marg{desired}\marg{yes}\marg{no}\\
% Execute \meta{yes} if the \meta{desired} setup matches with the
% current (user) setup. Execute \meta{no} else. We first check whether
% information in \meta{desired} is complete. If not, we amend it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pdifsetup#1{%
  \edef\pd@tempb{#1}%
  \pd@pdifsetup\pd@tempb{landscape,portrait}%
  \pd@pdifsetup\pd@tempb{screen,a4paper,letterpaper,smartboard,169}%
  \pd@pdifsetup\pd@tempb{slides,notes,slidesnotes}%
  \pd@pdifsetup\pd@tempb{present,print,handout}%
  \pd@pdifs@tup\pd@tempb
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@pdifsetup}
% \meta{desired}\marg{check}\\
% This macro checks whether at least one element of \meta{check}
% occurs in the list in \meta{desired}. If not, the entire list in
% \meta{check} is added to \meta{desired}, meaning that later on, any
% setup for this type will satisfy the check.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@pdifsetup#1#2{%
  \in@true
  \@tempcnta\z@
  \XKV@for@n{#2}\pd@tempa{%
    \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\pd@tempa,}{,#1,}%
    \ifin@\advance\@tempcnta\@ne\fi
  }%
  \ifnum\@tempcnta=\z@\XKV@addtolist@x#1{#2}\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@pdifs@tup}
% \marg{desired}\marg{yes}\marg{no}\\
% Checks whether the \meta{desired} setup matches the current setup.
% This macro is used internally when setting template keys. The idea
% is to first correct the input in the |ifsetup| key by amending
% specifications if they where not there. Then, when setting a
% template key, we just check whether all elements of the current
% setup appear in the \meta{desired} setup.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@pdifs@tup#1{%
  \in@true
  \XKV@whilist\pd@cursetup\pd@tempa\ifin@\fi{%
    \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\pd@tempa,}{,#1,}%
  }%
  \ifin@\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Set up the template system.
% First define all the options and presets available to create
% templates. All options save their argument to be used later.
% The |ifsetup| option controls for which the following options should
% be used. This:
% |textfont=\raggedright,| |ifsetup={a4paper,portrait},textfont=\small|
% makes the text font |\small|, but only for a4 portrait slides.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@tempa#1{%
  \define@key[pd]{template}{#1}[]{%
    \ifpd@ifsetup\@namedef{pd@@#1}{##1}\fi
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define all keys.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\XKV@for@n{%
  titlehook,titlepos,titlewidth,titlefont,%
  texthook,textpos,textwidth,textfont,textheight,%
  tochook,tocpos,tocwidth,tocfont,%
  stochook,stocpos,stocwidth,stocfont,%
  ntochook,ntocpos,ntocwidth,ntocfont,%
  tocfrsep,tocsecsep,tocslidesep,%
  tocsecm,toctcolor,tochlcolor,tochltcolor,%
  tocsecindent,tocslideindent,%
  lfhook,lfpos,lffont,lftemp,%
  cfhook,cfpos,cffont,cftemp,%
  rfhook,rfpos,rffont,rftemp,%
  iacolor,%
  clockhook,clockpos,clockwidth,clockheight,%
  clockcharsize,clockalign,clockcolor%
}\pd@tempb{\expandafter\pd@tempa\expandafter{\pd@tempb}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The |ifsetup| key first amends missing input using |\pd@pdifsetup|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@cmdkey[pd]{template}[pd@@]{ifsetup}[]{%
  \pd@pdifsetup\pd@@ifsetup{landscape,portrait}%
  \pd@pdifsetup\pd@@ifsetup{screen,a4paper,letterpaper,smartboard,169}%
  \pd@pdifsetup\pd@@ifsetup{slides,notes,slidesnotes}%
  \pd@pdifsetup\pd@@ifsetup{present,print,handout}%
  \pd@pdifs@tup\pd@@ifsetup\pd@ifsetuptrue\pd@ifsetupfalse
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Choice keys for orientation of toc.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@choicekey*[pd]{template}{tocorient}[\pd@tempa\pd@tocorient]{%
  v,h}{}
\define@choicekey*[pd]{template}{stocorient}[\pd@tempa\pd@stocorient]{%
  v,h}{}
\define@choicekey*[pd]{template}{ntocorient}[\pd@tempa\pd@ntocorient]{%
  v,h}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v1.4}{2005/12/10}{Replaced \texttt{\~} by \cs{space} to avoid
%   problems with Spanish babel}
% Presets so that templates do not need to specify every key.
% This also initializes some keys as to avoid errors in constructing
% the slide.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setkeys[pd]{template}{%
  ifsetup,%
  titlehook=Bl,titlepos=,titlewidth=\slidewidth,%
  titlefont=\raggedright,texthook=tl,textpos=,%
  textwidth=\slidewidth,textfont=\raggedright,%
  textheight=\slideheight,%
  tochook=tl,tocpos=,tocwidth=.2\slidewidth,%
  tocfont=\tiny\raggedright,%
  stochook=tl,stocpos=,stocwidth=.2\slidewidth,%
  stocfont=\tiny\raggedright,%
  ntochook=tl,ntocpos=,ntocwidth=.2\slidewidth,%
  ntocfont=\tiny\raggedright,%
  tocorient=v,stocorient=v,ntocorient=v,%
  tocfrsep=.5mm,tocsecsep=2ex,tocslidesep=0ex,%
  tocsecm=,toctcolor=black,tochlcolor=black,tochltcolor=white,%
  tocsecindent=0pt,tocslideindent=0pt,%
  lfhook=Bl,lfpos=,lffont=\scriptsize,lftemp=\pd@@lf,%
  cfhook=B,cfpos=,cffont=\scriptsize,cftemp=\pd@@cf,%
  rfhook=Br,rfpos=,rffont=\scriptsize,rftemp=\pd@@rf\ifx\pd@@rf
    \@empty\else\ifx\theslide\@empty\else\ -- \fi\fi\theslide,%
  iacolor=lightgray,%
  clockhook=tr,clockpos=,clockwidth=3cm,clockheight=\baselineskip,%
  clockcharsize=14pt,clockalign=2,clockcolor=black%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\pddefinepalettes}
% \marg{name}\marg{commands}\\
% Save the text color number and start scanning for palettes. |\pd@nopalettes|
% contains the number of palettes that we have seen in total in the
% style or preamble.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pddefinepalettes#1#2{%
  \ifx\pd@nopalettes\@undefined\@tempcnta\z@\else
    \@tempcnta\pd@nopalettes
  \fi
  \pd@pddefinepalettes{#1}{#2}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@pddefinepalettes}
% \marg{name}\marg{commands}\\
% Save the current \meta{name} and \meta{commands} to numbered macros
% to be used later again. If we find another brace |{| after these
% arguments, repeat the process.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@pddefinepalettes#1#2{%
  \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
  \@namedef{pd@pe@\the\@tempcnta @name}{#1}%
  \@namedef{pd@pe@#1@colors}{#2}%
  \@ifnextchar\bgroup\pd@pddefinepalettes{%
    \edef\pd@nopalettes{\the\@tempcnta}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@countcolors}
% Count the number of colors in the palette. We do this only once.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@countcolors{%
  \@tempcnta\@ne
  \@whilesw\ifx\pd@nocolors\@undefined\fi{%
    \XKV@ifundefined{\string\color@pdcolor\the\@tempcnta}{%
      \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne
      \edef\pd@nocolors{\the\@tempcnta}%
    }{\advance\@tempcnta\@ne}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Define the startpage to be 2 when using a pauseslide.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifpd@pauseslide\def\@pdfstartpage{2}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the style or preamble does not define palettes, do nothing. If
% there are palettes, but the user didn't specify one, use the first.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
  \ifx\pd@nopalettes\@undefined\else\ifx\pd@@palette\@undefined
    \@nameuse{pd@pe@\@nameuse{pd@pe@1@name}@colors}%
    \color{pdcolor1}%
    \let\default@color\current@color
    \let\pd@color\XC@current@color
  \fi\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Text color is black in handout mode.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifnum\pd@mode=2
    \color{black}%
    \def\pd@@iacolor{black}%
    \let\default@color\current@color
    \let\pd@color\XC@current@color
  \else\pd@countcolors\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Insert the pause slide.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifpd@pauseslide
    \begin{pauseslide}[toc=,bm=,trans=Replace,randomdots=false]{}%
    \end{pauseslide}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\pddefinetemplate}
% Define a template. This stores options and the background to macros.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pddefinetemplate{\@testopt\pd@pddefinetemplate{}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@pddefinetemplate}
% \changes{v1.2}{2005/10/09}{Changed to \cs{pd@namelet} for changed \pf{xcolor}}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Made it possible to redefine basis templates and
%   convey the changes to templates based on this basis}
% \oarg{basis}{name}{options}{background}\\
% Store options and background and define the environment \meta{name}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@pddefinetemplate[#1]#2#3#4{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The beginning of the environment just gets and sets its arguments
% and gets the body of the environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{#2}{\pd@getargsandbody{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The end of the environment. We process the body at least once, maybe
% more times, but that we will find out along the way. In case the
% body is not eaten in advance, this macro starts an |lrbox|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{end#2}{\ifpd@display\pd@slide\fi}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If there is no basis, we just store the options and the background.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
    \@namedef{pd@template@#2@options}{\setkeys[pd]{template}{#3}}%
    \@namedef{pd@template@#2@bg}{#4}%
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise, add options and background to existing macros.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \XKV@ifundefined{pd@template@#1@options}{%
      \pd@error{template `#1' undefined}}{%
      \def\pd@tempa{#1}\def\pd@tempb{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If \meta{basis} and \meta{name} are the same, expand options and
% background to avoid infinite loops.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \ifx\pd@tempa\pd@tempb
        \pd@namelet{pd@template@#2@options}{pd@template@#1@options}%
        \expandafter
          \XKV@addtomacro@n\csname pd@template@#2@options\endcsname
%    \end{macrocode}
% Make sure to reset the |ifsetup| key so that options are for all
% possible setups again.
%    \begin{macrocode}
          {\setkeys[pd]{template}{ifsetup,#3}}%
        \pd@namelet{pd@template@#2@bg}{pd@template@#1@bg}\expandafter
        \XKV@addtomacro@n\csname pd@template@#2@bg\endcsname{#4}%
      \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Else, use existing macros options and background macros and add the
% current settings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \@namedef{pd@template@#2@bg}{\@nameuse{pd@template@#1@bg}#4}%
        \@namedef{pd@template@#2@options}{%
          \@nameuse{pd@template@#1@options}%
          \setkeys[pd]{template}{ifsetup,#3}%
        }%
      \fi
    }%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@getargsandbody}
% \marg{name}\\
% First eat the optional argument and the slide title. Then
% collect the body of the slide: we
% read every time up to |\end|, we check whether we find the |\end| that
% has the name of the current slide environment. If not, we add all
% content and continue the search. If |method| is 1, we use \pf{verbatim}
% to read the body and write it to a temporary file. If |method| is 2, we do not
% eat the body at all, but redefine the end of the current environment
% to finish the |lrbox| that we will start later on.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@getargsandbody#1{\@testopt{\pd@get@rgsandbody{#1}}{}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@get@rgsandbody}
% \marg{name}\oarg{options}\marg{title}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@get@rgsandbody#1[#2]#3{%
  \pd@get@rgs@ndbody{#2}{#3}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here are three possible methods to process slides. The first will
% eat the entire body while scanning for |\end{slide}|. This fixes
% catcodes. The second writes the body to file. This allows for
% verbatim and overlays, but may be slow. The third uses an |lrbox| to
% typeset material directly. That allows for verbatim, but no
% overlays. Notice that we always use the first method when the slide
% should not be displayed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifcase\ifnum\pd@method>\z@\ifpd@display\@ne\fi\fi\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Start eating the body.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \pd@body{}%
    \def\pd@tempa{\pd@get@rgs@ndb@dy{#1}}%
  \else
    \ifnum\pd@method=\@ne
%    \end{macrocode}
% Start verbatim reading and writing to file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \def\pd@tempa{%
        \immediate\openout\pd@vrbout\jobname.vrb\relax
        \def\verbatim@processline{%
          \immediate\write\pd@vrbout{\the\verbatim@line}%
        }%
        \begingroup\let\do\@makeother\dospecials\catcode`\^^M\active
        \verbatim@start
      }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Redefine the end macro to stop verbatim reading and closing the file.
% Afterwards, execute the slide producing macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \@namedef{end#1}{%
        \endgroup\immediate\closeout\pd@vrbout
        \let\verbatim@processline\pd@orig@verbatim@processline
        \pd@slide
      }%
    \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% No overlays allowed with this method.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \pd@deloverlays
%    \end{macrocode}
% Create the slide.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \let\pd@tempa\pd@sl@de
%    \end{macrocode}
% Typeset content directly and store it in a box using |lrbox|. We
% redefine the end to finish this box and position it on the page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \@namedef{end#1}{%
        \end{pd@minipage}\end{lrbox}%
        \ifx\pd@@textpos\@empty\else
          \rput[\pd@@texthook](\pd@@textpos){\usebox\pd@textbox}%
        \fi
      }%
    \fi
  \fi
  \pd@tempa
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@get@rgs@ndbody}
% \marg{options}\marg{title}\\
% A common component in processing slides in \LaTeX\ or \LyX.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@get@rgs@ndbody#1#2{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set user keys.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \setkeys[pd]{glslide,slide}{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save title.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\pd@t@tle{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Perform some initial checks to see whether we actually need to process
% this slide or not.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \pd@displaytrue
  \def\pd@tempa{note}%
  \ifcase\pd@display
    \ifx\@currenvir\pd@tempa\relax\pd@displayfalse\fi
  \or
    \ifx\@currenvir\pd@tempa\else
      \def\pd@tempa{titleslide}%
      \ifx\@currenvir\pd@tempa\else
        \pd@displayfalse
        \stepcounter{slide}%
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@get@rgs@ndb@dy}
% \marg{name}\meta{text}|\end|\marg{envir}\\
% If \meta{envir} is equal to \meta{name}, we found the end of the
% environment and stop parsing. Otherwise, we add material to the token
% and continue.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\pd@get@rgs@ndb@dy#1#2\end#3{%
  \def\pd@tempa{#1}%
  \def\pd@tempb{#3}%
  \ifx\pd@tempa\pd@tempb
    \pd@body\expandafter{\the\pd@body#2}%
    \def\pd@tempa{\end{#1}}%
  \else
    \pd@body\expandafter{\the\pd@body#2\end{#3}}%
    \def\pd@tempa{\pd@get@rgs@ndb@dy{#1}}%
  \fi
  \pd@tempa
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@slide}
% This macro processes the slide, possibly many times, depending on
% what we encounter on the first run.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@slide{%
  \pd@overlayfalse
  \def\pd@nooverlays{1}%
  \setcounter{pd@overlay}\@ne
  \let\pd@labels\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save counter values so that these can be restored on overlays.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \XKV@for@o\pd@@counters\pd@tempa{%
    \expandafter\xdef\csname pd@counter@\pd@tempa\endcsname{%
      \expandafter\the\csname c@\pd@tempa\endcsname
    }%
  }%
  \pd@sl@de
  \@whilenum\c@pd@overlay<\pd@nooverlays\do{%
    \pd@overlaytrue
%    \end{macrocode}
% Restore counters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \XKV@for@o\pd@@counters\pd@tempa{%
      \setcounter\pd@tempa{\csname pd@counter@\pd@tempa\endcsname}%
    }%
    \stepcounter{pd@overlay}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Re-initialize the info for random dots.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifpd@@randomdots
      \let\pd@trandim\pd@randim
      \let\pd@tranpos\pd@ranpos
      \let\pd@trancol\pd@rancol
    \fi
    \pd@sl@de
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@sl@de}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Added missing \cs{pd@currenttype} initialization}
% \changes{v1.2}{2005/10/09}{Added \cs{@currentlabel} definition}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Template specific \texttt{textfont} properly sets \cs{default@color}}
% \changes{v1.4}{2005/12/10}{Added exceptions to inhibit logo/randomdots on blackslide/emptyslide}
% This is the main slide producing macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@sl@de{%
  \stepcounter{slide}\newpage
  \ifpd@overlay\addtocounter{slide}\m@ne\fi
  \edef\@currentlabel{\the\c@slide}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Initialize the overlays and switch to overlay 0. The material on this
% overlay will be visible.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \pst@Verb{tx@ovlDict begin InitOL /TheOL (0) def end}%
  \pst@Verb{tx@ovlDict begin (0) BOL end}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Load all template settings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@nameuse{pd@template@\@currenvir @options}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Insert background. Execute in a group to avoid local settings getting out.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@nameuse{pd@template@\@currenvir @bg}%
  \ifpd@@randomdots
    \ifpd@overlay\else
      \ifnum\pd@nocolors>\z@
        \let\pd@randim\@empty
        \let\pd@ranpos\@empty
        \let\pd@rancol\@empty
        \setrannum\pd@tempcnta\pd@@dmindots\pd@@dmaxdots
        \edef\pd@nodots{\the\pd@tempcnta}%
        \pd@tempcnta\z@
        \@whilesw\ifnum\pd@tempcnta<\pd@nodots\fi{%
          \advance\pd@tempcnta\@ne
          \setrandim\@tempdima\pd@@dminsize\pd@@dmaxsize
          \XKV@addtolist@x\pd@randim{\the\@tempdima}%
          \setrandim\@tempdima\pd@@dminwidth\pd@@dmaxwidth
          \setrandim\@tempdimb\pd@@dminheight\pd@@dmaxheight
          \XKV@addtolist@x\pd@ranpos{\the\@tempdima,\the\@tempdimb}%
          \setrannum\@tempcntb1\pd@nocolors
          \XKV@addtolist@x\pd@rancol{\the\@tempcntb}%
        }%
        \let\pd@trandim\pd@randim
        \let\pd@tranpos\pd@ranpos
        \let\pd@trancol\pd@rancol
      \else
        \let\pd@nodots\z@
      \fi
    \fi
    \@tempcnta\z@
    \@whilesw\ifnum\@tempcnta<\pd@nodots\fi{%
      \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
      \pd@pop\pd@trandim\pd@tempa\pd@pop\pd@tranpos\pd@tempb
      \pd@pop\pd@tranpos\pd@tempc\pd@pop\pd@trancol\pd@tempd
      \ifnum\pd@@dbright<\z@
        \@tempcntb\pd@@dbright
        \advance\@tempcntb100
        \edef\pd@tempd{\pd@tempd!\the\@tempcntb!black}%
      \else
        \@tempcntb-\pd@@dbright
        \advance\@tempcntb100
        \edef\pd@tempd{\pd@tempd!\the\@tempcntb}%
      \fi
      {\ifx\pd@@dprop\@empty\else
        \expandafter\psset\expandafter{\pd@@dprop}%
      \fi
      \psdot[dotsize=\pd@tempa,linecolor=pdcolor\pd@tempd]%
        (\pd@tempb,\pd@tempc)}%
    }%
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Insert the logo.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\pd@tempa{pauseslide}%
  \def\pd@tempb{emptyslide}%
  \ifx\pd@@logopos\@empty\else
    \ifx\pd@logobox\@undefined\else
      \ifx\@currenvir\pd@tempa\else
        \ifx\@currenvir\pd@tempb\else
          \rput[\pd@@logohook](\pd@@logopos){\usebox\pd@logobox}%
        \fi
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Clock coding. Contributed by Alexander Grahn.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifpd@@clock
%    \end{macrocode}
% Extract the color specification, convert it to |rgb| and store it
% to be used for the clock. This uses some \pf{xcolor} macros.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\pd@tempa##1,##2,##3\@nil{##1 ##2 ##3}%
    \extractcolorspec\pd@@clockcolor\pd@tempb
    \expandafter\convertcolorspec\pd@tempb{rgb}\pd@tempb
    \edef\pd@tempa{\expandafter\pd@tempa\pd@tempb\@nil}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Insert the clock.
% \changes{v1.4}{2005/12/10}{Added arguments for \texttt{clockformat} and \texttt{clockrefresh} values}
% \changes{v1.6}{2021/03/25}{Fixed rotation of the clock for smartboard paper}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\pd@@clockpos\@empty\else
      \@tempdima\pd@@clockcharsize
      \rput[\pd@@clockhook](\pd@@clockpos){%
        \makebox[\pd@@clockwidth][l]{\rule{0pt}{\pd@@clockheight}%
          \pd@PdfAnnot{\pd@@clockwidth}{\pd@@clockheight}{0pt}{%
            /Subtype/Widget/FT/Tx/T (pdclock.\the\pd@clockcnt) /Ff 1
            /DA (/Helv \strip@pt\@tempdima\space Tf \pd@tempa\space rg)
            /MK<</R \ifnum\pd@orient=\z@\ifnum\pd@paper=\thr@@ 0\else 90\fi\else 0\fi /BG []/BC []>>
            /Q \pd@@clockalign\space
            /AA <<
              /PO << /S/JavaScript/JS(\pd@startclock\pd@@clockformat\pd@@clockrefresh) >>
              /PC << /S/JavaScript/JS(app.clearInterval(pdclock_\the\pd@clockcnt);) >>
            >>
          }%
        }%
        \pd@AppendToFields{\pd@PdfLastAnn}%
        \global\advance\pd@clockcnt\@ne
      }%
    \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Write transition effect to PDF.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \pd@pdftrans
  \ifpd@overlay\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% When not an overlay or note, make a bookmark and toc entry.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\pd@tempa{note}%
    \ifx\@currenvir\pd@tempa\else
      \pd@maketocbm0%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Make a target on this page so that we can make links to this page.
% We don't use pdf page links as that won't give good link in handout
% mode with 2 slides per page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \hyper@anchorstart{slide.\the\c@slide}\hyper@anchorend
    \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Initialize numbers and macros for relative stepping and pausing.
% |\pd@currentstate| remembers the state when doing overlays.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\pd@reloverlay{1}%
  \let\pd@closeitem\relax
  \def\pd@currentstate{0}%
  \let\pd@currenttype\relax
  \setcounter{pd@pause}\@ne
  \let\pd@revert\@firstofone
  \setcounter{pd@onslidedepth}\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Position the title.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\pd@@titlepos\@empty\else
    \def\pd@tempa{%
      \begin{minipage}\pd@@titlewidth
      \pd@@titlefont\strut
      \ifpd@section
        \expandafter\pd@sectiontitle\expandafter{\pd@t@tle}%
      \else
        \expandafter\pd@slidetitle\expandafter{\pd@t@tle}%
      \fi
      \end{minipage}%
    }%
    \rput[\pd@@titlehook](\pd@@titlepos){%
      \ifpd@pauseslide
        \hyperlink{pauseslide}{\pd@tempa}%
      \else
        \pd@tempa
      \fi
    }%
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Position the table of contents, possibly split. No |minipage| when
% making a horizontal toc.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\pd@@tocpos\@empty\else
    \rput[\pd@@tochook](\pd@@tocpos){%
      \ifnum\pd@tocorient=\z@\begin{minipage}\pd@@tocwidth\fi
      \let\pd@usedtocfont\pd@@tocfont
      \let\pd@usedtocorient\pd@tocorient
      \pd@puttoc0%
      \ifnum\pd@usedtocorient=\z@\end{minipage}\fi
    }%
  \fi
  \ifx\pd@@stocpos\@empty\else
    \rput[\pd@@stochook](\pd@@stocpos){%
      \ifnum\pd@stocorient=\z@\begin{minipage}\pd@@tocwidth\fi
      \let\pd@usedtocfont\pd@@stocfont
      \let\pd@usedtocorient\pd@stocorient
      \pd@puttoc1%
      \ifnum\pd@usedtocorient=\z@\end{minipage}\fi
    }%
  \fi
  \ifx\pd@@ntocpos\@empty\else
    \rput[\pd@@ntochook](\pd@@ntocpos){%
      \ifnum\pd@ntocorient=\z@\begin{minipage}\pd@@tocwidth\fi
      \let\pd@usedtocfont\pd@@ntocfont
      \let\pd@usedtocorient\pd@ntocorient
      \pd@puttoc2%
      \ifnum\pd@usedtocorient=\z@\end{minipage}\fi
    }%
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Position footers.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\pd@@lfpos\@empty\else
    \rput[\pd@@lfhook](\pd@@lfpos){\pd@@lffont\pd@@lftemp}%
  \fi
  \ifx\pd@@cfpos\@empty\else
    \rput[\pd@@cfhook](\pd@@cfpos){\pd@@cffont\pd@@cftemp}%
  \fi
  \ifx\pd@@rfpos\@empty\else
    \rput[\pd@@rfhook](\pd@@rfpos){\pd@@rffont\pd@@rftemp}%
  \fi
  \ifnum\pd@method<2
    \ifx\pd@@textpos\@empty\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Position the main text box and put the material in, maybe coming
% from eating the body into |\pd@body| or reading it from a file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \rput[\pd@@texthook](\pd@@textpos){%
        \pd@sl@d@
        \ifnum\pd@method=\z@\the\pd@body\else
          \input\jobname.vrb
        \fi
        \end{pd@minipage}%
      }%
    \fi
    \let\pd@tempa\relax
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% For direct processing, start the |lrbox| to typeset and capture
% content.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\pd@tempa{\begin{lrbox}\pd@textbox\pd@sl@d@}%
  \fi
  \pd@tempa
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@sl@d@}
% A common component in |\pd@sl@de|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@sl@d@{%
  \begin{pd@minipage}%
  \let\pd@tempa\color
  \def\color##1{\pd@tempa{##1}\let\default@color\current@color}%
  \pd@@textfont
  \let\color\pd@tempa
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \changes{v1.2}{2005/10/09}{Redefine \cs{pd@slidetitle} in note template}
% The implementation of notes.
% The first macro is a temporary counter to find whether the new note
% still belongs to the current slide or that it belongs to a new slide.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@notet{0}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define the template using our mechanism.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\pddefinetemplate{note}{%
  titlepos={.04\slidewidth,.92\slideheight},%
  titlefont=\let\pd@slidetitle\@firstofone\color{black}\Large,%
  textpos={.07\slidewidth,.82\slideheight},%
  textfont=\color{black},textwidth=.86\slidewidth,%
  lfpos={.04\slidewidth,.035\slideheight},%
  lffont=\color{black}\scriptsize,%
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.035\slideheight},%
  cffont=\color{black}\scriptsize,%
  rfpos={.96\slidewidth,.035\slideheight},%
  rffont=\color{black}\scriptsize,%
  rftemp=\pd@@rf\ifx\pd@@rf\@empty\else
    \ifx\thenote\@empty\else\space--\space\fi\fi\thenote,%
}{%
  \addtocounter{slide}\m@ne
%    \end{macrocode}
% If this is another note with the same slide, count it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifnum\c@slide=\pd@notet
    \stepcounter{note}%
  \else
    \setcounter{note}{1}%
  \fi
  \xdef\pd@notet{\the\c@slide}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The background.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \psline[linewidth=.5pt](0,.87\slideheight)%
    (\slidewidth,.87\slideheight)%
  \psline[linewidth=.5pt](0,.08\slideheight)%
    (\slidewidth,.08\slideheight)%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Implement pauseslide.
% This is an empty slide with just a very big button on it to go back
% to the original page where we came from.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\pddefinetemplate{pauseslide}{}{%
  \addtocounter{slide}\m@ne
  \hyper@anchorstart{pauseslide}\hyper@anchorend
  \psframe*[linecolor=\pd@pauseslidecolor](0,0)(\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  {\color{\pd@pauseslidecolor}%
  \rput[cm](.5\slidewidth,.5\slideheight){%
  \Acrobatmenu{GoBack}{\setlength\fboxsep{10cm}\fbox{GoBack}}}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Empty slides. For special uses like displaying big tables or photos.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\pddefinetemplate{emptyslide}{textpos={0,\slideheight}}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\maketitle}
% This implementation
% is more or less similar as what is in \pf{article}. First we make a
% backup of the original |\maketitle| to be used maybe in handout mode,
% see below.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\pd@orig@maketitle\maketitle
\def\maketitle{\@testopt\pd@maketitle{}}
\def\pd@maketitle[#1]{%
  \begin{titleslide}[#1,toc=,bm=,trans=Replace,method=normal]{}%
    \let\footnote\thanks
    \def\thefootnote{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote}%
    {\pd@title{\pd@@titlefont\@title}\par}{%
      \vskip2em\pd@@textfont
      \begin{tabular}[t]{@{} c @{}}%
        \@author
      \end{tabular}\par
      \vskip1.5em\small\@date
    }\par
    \small\@thanks
    \vfil\null
  \end{titleslide}%
  \c@footnote\z@
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@maketocbm}
% \marg{type}\\
% \meta{type} indicates the kind of entry that we need to write to toc and
% or bookmark file. 0 is a normal slide, 1 is a section, 2 is a hidden
% section. The title of the entry is assumed to be in |\pd@slidetitle|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@maketocbm#1{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Make the bookmark entry so that it allows for easy counting of entries
% in sections.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\pd@tempa{\immediate\write\pd@bmout{%
    \string\pdbookmark{sec.\the\c@pd@section\ifnum#1=\z@.slide\fi}{%
    \ifnum#1=\z@ sec.\the\c@pd@section\fi}{\the\c@slide}%
    {\the\@temptokena}%
  }}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Notice that |\pd@@bm| can be undefined at every slide, even after
% use on one slide, as the definition is done locally in the slide
% environment. So no resetting is necessary on the start of a slide.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\pd@@bm\@undefined
    \@temptokena\expandafter{\pd@t@tle}%
  \else
    \ifx\pd@@bm\@empty
      \let\pd@tempa\relax
    \else
      \@temptokena\expandafter{\pd@@bm}%
    \fi
  \fi
  \pd@tempa
%    \end{macrocode}
% Write the toc entry.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\pd@tempa{\immediate\write\pd@tocout{%
    \string\pdcontentsline{#1}{\the\c@slide}{\the\@temptokena}%
  }}%
  \ifx\pd@@toc\@undefined
    \@temptokena\expandafter{\pd@t@tle}%
  \else
    \ifx\pd@@toc\@empty
      \let\pd@tempa\relax
    \else
      \@temptokena\expandafter{\pd@@toc}%
    \fi
  \fi
  \pd@tempa
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pdbookmark}
% \marg{sec1}\marg{sec2}\marg{target}\marg{title}\\
% First we defined |\pdbookmark| to count the number of bookmarks
% that needs to be nested below every section bookmark. We need to
% know that for the pdf bookmark specification.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pdbookmark#1#2#3#4{%
  \@tempcnta\pd@pdb@@kmark{#2}%
  \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
  \@nameedef{pd@be@#2}{\the\@tempcnta}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@pdb@@kmark}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Solved bug with unexpandable \cs{XKV@ifundefined}
%   when not running the $\varepsilon$-\TeX\ engine (e.g. te\TeX\ 2)}
% \marg{section}\\
% Returns the number of slides that we already counter for the
% current section. Don't use |\XKV@ifundefined| here as that is not
% expandable when not running $\varepsilon$-\TeX\ engine.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@pdb@@kmark#1{%
  \@ifundefined{pd@be@#1}0{\csname pd@be@#1\endcsname}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@pdbookmark}
% \changes{v1.2}{2005/10/09}{Solved bug with Acrobat Distiller}
% \marg{sec1}\marg{sec2}\marg{target}\marg{title}\\
% Redefine the macro to make the actual bookmark.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifxetex\else
  \def\pd@pdbookmark#1#2#3#4{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use |\pdfstringdef| to clean the title. Not everything can enter as
% a bookmark in pdf.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \pdfstringdef\pd@tempa{#4}%
    \pdfmark{pdfmark=/OUT,%
      Count={\pd@pdb@@kmark{#1}},Dest={slide.#3},%
      View={/XYZ null null null},Title={\pd@tempa}%
    }%
  }
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pdcontentsline}
% \marg{type}\marg{target}\marg{title}\\
% Saves all input arguments to macros with names like |\pd@te@i|.
% Further, it computes with a lag the starting and stopping targets
% for every entry, |\pd@te@i@start| and |\pd@te@i@stop|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pdcontentsline#1#2#3{%
  \ifnum\@tempcnta>\z@
    \@nameedef{pd@te@\the\@tempcnta @start}{\pd@tempa}%
    \@namedef{pd@te@\the\@tempcnta @stop}{#2}%
  \fi
  \def\pd@tempa{#2}%
  \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
  \@namedef{pd@te@\the\@tempcnta}{%
    \pdcontentsline{#1}{#2}{#3}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Reading \texttt{.bm} and \texttt{.toc}
% file \cs{AtBeginDocument} to allow for using \pf{inputenc} for toc
% and bm entries}
% \changes{v1.4}{2005/12/10}{Solved bug in computing stopping slide for last toc entry}
% Read the bm and toc files into memory to speed up compilation.
% Along the way, we compute the starting and stopping target numbers
% for highlighting toc entries and the number of slides to be nested
% under a section bookmark entry. At begin document for allowing
% loading of \pf{inputenc} also for bm and toc entries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
  \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.bm}{}{}%
  \let\pdbookmark\pd@pdbookmark
  \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.bm}{}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Rewrite the bookmarks file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \immediate\openout\pd@bmout\jobname.bm\relax
  \@tempcnta\z@
  \def\pd@tempa{0}%
  \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.toc}{}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save the number of toc entries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \edef\pd@notocentries{\the\@tempcnta}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Compute the starting and stopping number for the last entry.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\r@lastslide\@undefined\@tempcntb\pd@tempa\else
    \edef\pd@tempb{\expandafter\@secondoffive\r@lastslide}%
    \@tempcntb\pd@tempb
  \fi
  \advance\@tempcntb\@ne
  \@nameedef{pd@te@\the\@tempcnta @start}{\pd@tempa}%
  \@nameedef{pd@te@\the\@tempcnta @stop}{\the\@tempcntb}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Rewrite the toc file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \immediate\openout\pd@tocout\jobname.toc\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Initialize the |\pdcontentsline| macro for making toc entries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\pdcontentsline\pd@pdcontentsline
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@puttoc}
% \marg{type}\\
% Typeset the table of contents of type \meta{type} from memory.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@puttoc#1{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Initialize some numbers that we will use.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@tempcnta\z@
  \@tempcntb\z@
  \@tempswatrue
  \def\pd@toctype{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Parse all available toc entries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@whilenum\@tempcnta<\pd@notocentries\do{%
    \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
    \@nameuse{pd@te@\the\@tempcnta}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@pdcontentsline}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Solved bug using different toc widths}
% \marg{type}\marg{target}\marg{title}\\
% Typesets a toc entry.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@pdcontentsline#1#2#3{%
  \let\pd@tempa\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Full table of contents (sections and slides).
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifcase\pd@toctype
%    \end{macrocode}
% A normal slide.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifcase#1\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Slides before section 1.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \ifnum\@tempcntb=\z@
        \let\pd@tempa\pd@tocdisplay
      \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% A slide in the current section.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifnum\@tempcntb=\c@pd@section
          \let\pd@tempa\pd@tocdisplay
        \fi
      \fi
    \or
%    \end{macrocode}
% A normal section.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \global\advance\@tempcntb\@ne
      \let\pd@tempa\pd@tocdisplay
    \or
%    \end{macrocode}
% A hidden section.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \global\advance\@tempcntb\@ne
      \ifnum\@tempcntb=\c@pd@section
        \let\pd@tempa\pd@tocdisplay
      \fi
    \fi
  \or
%    \end{macrocode}
% Typeset only sections.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifcase#1\relax\or
%    \end{macrocode}
% A normal section.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \global\advance\@tempcntb\@ne
      \let\pd@tempa\pd@tocdisplay
    \or
%    \end{macrocode}
% A hidden section.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \global\advance\@tempcntb\@ne
      \ifnum\@tempcntb=\c@pd@section
        \let\pd@tempa\pd@tocdisplay
      \fi
    \fi
  \or
%    \end{macrocode}
% Only slides in current section or before the first section.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum#1=\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% An entry in the current section.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \ifnum\@tempcntb=\c@pd@section
        \let\pd@tempa\pd@tocdisplay
      \fi
    \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Count sections.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \global\advance\@tempcntb\@ne
    \fi
  \fi
  \ifpd@@hlentries\ifx\pd@tempa\relax\else
    \ifnum#1=\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% A normal highlighted slide.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \ifnum\c@slide<\@nameuse{pd@te@\the\@tempcnta @start}%
      \else
        \ifnum\c@slide<\@nameuse{pd@te@\the\@tempcnta @stop}%
          \let\pd@tempa\pd@tochighlight
        \fi
      \fi
    \else
      \ifpd@@hlsections
%    \end{macrocode}
% A highlighted section.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifnum\@tempcntb=\c@pd@section
          \let\pd@tempa\pd@tochighlight
        \fi
      \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% A section with a page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifnum#2=\c@slide\ifnum\@nameuse{pd@te@\the
          \@tempcnta @stop}=\c@slide\else
          \let\pd@tempa\pd@tochighlight
        \fi\fi
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Build the entry, but only if the entry should be visible.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\pd@tempa\relax\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Some skip. Execute the font settings so that skips like |.6ex| work
% properly.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \if@tempswa\@tempswafalse\else
      \pd@usedtocfont
      \ifnum\pd@usedtocorient=\z@
        \ifnum#1=\z@\vskip\pd@@tocslidesep\else\vskip\pd@@tocsecsep\fi
      \else
        \ifnum#1=\z@\hskip\pd@@tocslidesep\else\hskip\pd@@tocsecsep\fi
      \fi
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add a section marker.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum#1=\z@\else\pd@@tocsecm\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Output the entry. This works as follows.
% The text |#3| is passed through one macro of |\pd@tocslide| or
% |\pd@tocsection| which adds a `per entry layout' (eg a bullet).
% Then |\pd@tempa| (which is |\pd@tocdisplay| or |\pd@tochighlight|)
% displays the item as requested and |\hyperlink| adds a link to the entry.
% The lengths |\@tempdima| and |\@tempdimb| contain the horizontal
% indent and the remaining space for the entry respectively. The first
% entry does not get an indent if it is a slide.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifcase\pd@toctype
      \@tempdimb\pd@@tocwidth
    \or
      \@tempdimb\pd@@stocwidth
    \or
      \@tempdimb\pd@@ntocwidth
    \fi
    \ifnum#1=\z@
      \ifnum\@tempcntb=\z@\@tempdima\z@\else
        \@tempdima\pd@@tocslideindent
        \advance\@tempdimb-\pd@@tocslideindent
      \fi
      \hyperlink{slide.#2}{\pd@tempa{\pd@tocslide{#3}}}%
    \else
      \@tempdima\pd@@tocsecindent
      \advance\@tempdimb-\pd@@tocsecindent
      \hyperlink{slide.#2}{\pd@tempa{\pd@tocsection{#3}}}%
    \fi
    \ifnum\pd@usedtocorient=\z@\par\fi
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% The keys for the |\tableofcontents| macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@choicekey[pd]{toc}{content}[\pd@tempa\pd@content]{%
  all,sections,currentsection,future,futuresections}{}
\define@choicekey[pd]{toc}{type}[\pd@tempa\pd@type]{0,1}{}
\presetkeys[pd]{toc}{content=all,type=0}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
% Typesets overviews.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\tableofcontents{\@testopt\pd@tableofcontents{}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@tableofcontents}
% \oarg{options}\\
% Workhorse.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@tableofcontents[#1]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% To keep definitions like |\pd@@type| (reused in |itemize|) local.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \begingroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set keys with use input.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \setkeys[pd]{toc}{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% This keeps track of whether we are in a hidden section.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\pd@tempc\z@
  \def\pdcontentsline##1##2##3{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Count sections in the toc.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum##1>\z@\advance\@tempcntb\@ne\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Used for additional markup like |\bfseries|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \let\pd@tempb\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% The line that is to be typeset.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\pd@tempa{\hyperlink{slide.##2}{\pd@tempb##3}\par}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If a line should not be displayed, then here is the action to be
% taken depending on the type. 0 leaves out material, 1 typesets it
% in inactive color.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\pd@type=\z@
      \def\pd@tempd{\let\pd@tempa\relax}%
    \else
      \def\pd@tempd{\def\pd@tempb{\color\pd@@iacolor}}%
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Update whether we are in a hidden section.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifcase##1\or\let\pd@tempc\z@\or
      \ifnum\@tempcntb=\c@pd@section
        \let\pd@tempc\z@
      \else
        \let\pd@tempc\@ne
      \fi
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% If in hidden section, hide it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\pd@tempc=\@ne\pd@tempd\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here are the rules for displaying material, given the input of the user.
% Case 0 is `all'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifcase\pd@content\or
%    \end{macrocode}
% Case `sections'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \ifnum##1=\z@\let\pd@tempa\relax\fi
    \or
%    \end{macrocode}
% Case `currentsection'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \ifnum\@tempcntb=\c@pd@section\else\pd@tempd\fi
    \or
%    \end{macrocode}
% Case `future'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \ifnum\@tempcnta<\c@slide\pd@tempd\fi
    \or
%    \end{macrocode}
% Case `futuresections'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \ifnum\@tempcntb<\c@pd@section\pd@tempd\fi
      \ifnum##1=\z@\pd@tempd\fi
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% If a section, use bold font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum##1>\z@\XKV@addtomacro@n\pd@tempb\bfseries\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Finally, typeset the entry and add some spacing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\pd@tempa\relax\else
      \if@tempswa\@tempswafalse\else
        \ifnum##1=\z@\else\vskip5pt\fi
      \fi
      \ifnum##1=\z@\ifnum\@tempcntb=\z@\else\hskip15pt\fi\fi
      \pd@tempa
    \fi
  }%
  \@tempcnta\z@
  \@tempcntb\z@
  \@tempswatrue
%    \end{macrocode}
% Loop over all available toc entries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@whilenum\@tempcnta<\pd@notocentries\do{%
    \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
    \@nameuse{pd@te@\the\@tempcnta}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Restore everything.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \endgroup
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Options for parts and sections. The template key allows for modification
% of user input for normal slide and wide slide. A style can define
% the environment that should take the place of, eg, |wideslide| when
% the user requests that template.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@choicekey*[pd]{section}{tocsection}[\pd@tempa\pd@tempb]{%
  false,true,hidden}{}
\define@boolkey[pd]{section}[pd@@]{slide}[true]{}
\define@cmdkey[pd]{section}[pd@@]{template}{%
  \def\pd@tempa{slide}%
  \ifx\pd@@template\pd@tempa
    \let\pd@@template\pd@@sectemp
  \else
    \def\pd@tempa{wideslide}%
    \ifx\pd@@template\pd@tempa
      \let\pd@@template\pd@@widesectemp
    \fi
  \fi
}
\presetkeys[pd]{section}{tocsection=true,slide=true,template=slide}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Keys for style developers to overwrite user requests silently.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@cmdkeys[pd]{section}[pd@@]{sectemp,widesectemp}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=slide,widesectemp=slide}
\AtBeginDocument{\disable@keys[pd]{section}{sectemp,widesectemp}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@orig@section}
% Make a backup of the original |\section|, to be used later.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\pd@orig@section\section
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\section}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Corrected bug not allowing commas in section titles}
% Used to create parts in the presentation and sections in the toc.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\section{\@testopt\pd@section{}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@section}
% \oarg{options}\marg{title}\\
% Creates the part.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@section[#1]#2{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Necessary to keep toc and bm definitions local.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \begingroup
  \pd@sectiontrue
%    \end{macrocode}
% Extract the keys specific for |\part| first as to know what we are
% going to produce.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \setkeys*[pd]{section}{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% |\pd@tempb| comes from the |tocsection| key.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifnum\pd@tempb=\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% |\XKV@rm|
% contains all remaining keys that could not be set in the previous
% |\setkeys| (namely, keys not in the |part| family).
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifpd@@slide
      \toks@{#2}%
      \@temptokena\expandafter{\XKV@rm}%
      \edef\pd@tempa{%
        \noexpand\begin{\pd@@template}%
        [bm={\the\toks@},toc={\the\toks@},%
        \the\@temptokena]{\the\toks@}%
        \noexpand\end{\pd@@template}%
      }%
      \pd@tempa
    \fi
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set all slide specific keys as |bm| and |toc|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \setrmkeys*[pd]{slide}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Make the toc and bm entries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \stepcounter{pd@section}%
    \stepcounter{slide}%
    \def\pd@t@tle{#2}%
    \pd@maketocbm\pd@tempb
    \addtocounter{slide}\m@ne
    \ifpd@@slide
%    \end{macrocode}
% Produce a slide if necessary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \toks@{#2}%
      \@temptokena\expandafter{\XKV@rm}%
      \edef\pd@tempa{%
        \noexpand\begin{\pd@@template}%
        [\the\@temptokena,bm=,toc=]{\the\toks@}%
        \noexpand\end{\pd@@template}%
      }%
      \pd@tempa
    \fi
  \fi
  \endgroup
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\onslide}
% The normal version puts material on overlay 1, hence invisible in
% ps or pdf. The starred version eats its argument, hence does not
% move the cursor. The plus version put material in the inactive
% color.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\onslide{%
  \@ifnextchar-\pd@@nslide{\XKV@ifstar{\pd@onslide1}{%
  \XKV@ifplus{\pd@onslide2}{\pd@onslide0}}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@onslide}
% \changes{v1.2}{2005/10/09}{Replaced \cs{ignorespaces} by \cs{@bsphack}
%   \cs{@esphack} in starred version}
% \marg{type}\marg{overlays}\\
% The workhorse. First determine whether the material should be
% visible from the \meta{overlays} information. If not, process it in
% the chosen way in \meta{type}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@onslide#1#2{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Display or not?
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \pd@testdisp0{#2}%
  \if@tempswa
%    \end{macrocode}
% Display.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \let\pd@tempa\@firstofone
  \else
    \ifcase#1\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Switch to overlay 1 (invisible), output |#1|, switch back to overlay 0.
% We record the depth. This allows us to check whether we are in
% hidden material already. If that is the case, don't step back to
% overlay 0 as that will make following material visible again.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \long\def\pd@tempa##1{%
        \pst@Verb{tx@ovlDict begin (1) BOL end}%
        \stepcounter{pd@onslidedepth}%
        ##1%
        \addtocounter{pd@onslidedepth}\m@ne
        \ifnum\c@pd@onslidedepth=\z@\ifnum\pd@currentstate=\z@
          \pst@Verb{tx@ovlDict begin (0) BOL end}%
        \fi\fi
      }%
    \or
%    \end{macrocode}
% Eat material.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \long\def\pd@tempa##1{\@bsphack\@esphack}%
    \or
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put material in inactive color.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \long\def\pd@tempa##1{{\color\pd@@iacolor##1}}%
    \fi
  \fi
  \pd@tempa
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@testdisp}
% \marg{type}\marg{overlays}\\
% This macro is used by both |\onslide| and |\item|. The former can
% use relative notation for which \meta{type} should be 0. For the
% latter, \meta{type} is 1. \meta{overlays} is a specification of
% overlays where material should be visible.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@testdisp#1#2{%
  \@tempswafalse
%    \end{macrocode}
% Parse the comma separated specification.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \XKV@for@n{#2}\pd@tempa{\expandafter\pd@t@stdisp\pd@tempa--\@nil#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@t@stdisp}
% \meta{s1}|-|\meta{s2}|-|\meta{s3}|\@nil|\marg{type}\\
% Separate the input and check in which case we ended up. This macro
% also computes the number of overlays that is necessary for this
% slide. Notice several |\relax| at possibly unexpected places. This
% seemed necessary for \TeX\ to properly set |\@tempswa|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@t@stdisp#1-#2-#3\@nil#4{%
  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% |-x| case.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum#4=\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Parse input further to find if relative syntax was used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \pd@checkrel#2\@nil\@tempcnta
    \else
      \@tempcnta#2%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The item has no particular starting point, so it starts from overlay
% 1. Save this for relative |\onslide| syntax in the current item.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \def\pd@reloverlay{1}%
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% |\@tempcnta| now contains the number of overlays necessary for this
% part of the specification. Take the maximum.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \pd@compnooverlays\@tempcnta
    \ifnum\c@pd@overlay>\@tempcnta\else\@tempswatrue\fi
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% |x|, |x-| and |x-y| cases. Check relative syntax and store the
% corrected number in |\@tempcnta|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum#4=\z@
      \pd@checkrel#1\@nil\@tempcnta
    \else
      \@tempcnta#1%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here, the item has a special starting point. Save that to be able
% to compute relative syntax in subsequent |\onslide|s.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \def\pd@reloverlay{#1}%
    \fi
    \ifx\@empty#2\@empty\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% |x| and |x-| cases.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \pd@compnooverlays\@tempcnta
      \ifx\@empty#3\@empty\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% |x| case.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifnum\c@pd@overlay=\@tempcnta\@tempswatrue\fi
      \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% |x-| case.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifnum\c@pd@overlay<\@tempcnta\else\@tempswatrue\fi
      \fi
    \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% |x-y| case. Store the final number |y| in |\@tempcntb|, maybe
% corrected for relative syntax.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \ifnum#4=\z@
        \pd@checkrel#2\@nil\@tempcntb
      \else
        \@tempcntb#2%
      \fi
      \pd@compnooverlays\@tempcntb
      \ifnum\c@pd@overlay<\@tempcnta\else
        \ifnum\c@pd@overlay>\@tempcntb\else\@tempswatrue\fi
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@checkrel}
% \meta{number}|\@nil|\marg{counter}\\
% Checks whether \meta{number} starts with a |+| and if yes, adds the
% current item number in |\pd@reloverlay| to \meta{counter} to make
% relative syntax possible.
%    \begin{macrocode}
% Check whether relative syntax has been used.
\def\pd@checkrel#1#2\@nil#3{%
  \def\pd@tempa{#1}%
  \def\pd@tempb{+}%
  \ifx\pd@tempa\pd@tempb
    #3#2\advance#3\pd@reloverlay
  \else#3#1#2\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@compnooverlays}
% Keep track of the biggest number that we see as to compute the
% number of overlays that we need to produce. Notice the |\relax| again.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@compnooverlays#1{%
  \ifnum#1>\pd@nooverlays\xdef\pd@nooverlays{\the#1}\fi\relax
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@orig@item}
% Copy of \LaTeX's |\@item|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\pd@orig@item\@item
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@item}
% \oarg{label}\\
% Creates the item label etcetera. We add an optional argument for
% overlay specifications.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@item[#1]{\@ifnextchar<{\pd@item[#1]}{\pd@item[#1]<>}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@item}
% \oarg{label}\larg{overlays}\\
% This item allows for hiding the bullet and following content.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@item[#1]<#2>{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Possibly switch state.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \pd@closeitem
%    \end{macrocode}
% Enter some corrections when switching list type.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\pd@@type\pd@currenttype\else
    \ifnum\pd@@type=\z@
      \pst@Verb{tx@ovlDict begin (1) BOL end}%
    \else
      \pst@Verb{tx@ovlDict begin (0) BOL end}%
      \normalcolor
    \fi
    \global\let\pd@currenttype\pd@@type
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Make sure that we are on overlay 0 when the current state is such.
% Then check if we need hiding.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifnum\pd@currentstate=\z@
    \normalcolor\pst@Verb{tx@ovlDict begin (0) BOL end}%
    \pd@hide{#2}%
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Enter this color, just in case no other declarations will follow.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \color\pd@@iacolor
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% We need to switch state at the next item. Take care of local definition.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\@empty#2\@empty\else
    \def\pd@closeitem{\gdef\pd@currentstate{0}}%
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Insert |\leavevmode| to avoid ps code to `leak into' |\item|, like
% which used to be the case when |\item\onslide{2-}{test}\pause|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \pd@orig@item[#1]\leavevmode\ignorespaces
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@orig@@trivlist}
% \begin{macro}{\@trivlist}
% Save the current state for later (after getting back from nested
% lists). And we initialize some helper functions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\pd@orig@@trivlist\@trivlist
\def\@trivlist{%
  \global\expandafter\let\csname pd@currentstate\the\c@pd@trivlist
    \endcsname\pd@currentstate
  \ifnum\pd@@type=\z@\let\pd@closeitem\relax\fi
  \stepcounter{pd@trivlist}%
  \pd@orig@@trivlist
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@orig@endtrivlist}
% \begin{macro}{\endtrivlist}
% At the end of each list, make sure that we re-initialize the state
% of that level, if necessary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\pd@orig@endtrivlist\endtrivlist
\def\endtrivlist{%
  \addtocounter{pd@trivlist}\m@ne
  \pd@revert{%
    \global\expandafter\let\expandafter\pd@currentstate\csname
      pd@currentstate\the\c@pd@trivlist\endcsname
  }%
  \pd@orig@endtrivlist
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@hide}
% \meta{overlays}\\
% Hides following material until the end of the current group, usually
% the end of an environment like |itemize|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@hide#1{%
  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% If still active, we might need to become inactive.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\pd@currentstate=\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check the state of this item.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \pd@testdisp1{#1}%
      \if@tempswa\else
        \ifnum\pd@@type=\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Hide material onto overlay 1.
%    \begin{macrocode}
          \pst@Verb{tx@ovlDict begin (1) BOL end}%
        \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Switch to inactive color.
%    \begin{macrocode}
          \color\pd@@iacolor
        \fi
        \gdef\pd@currentstate{1}%
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pause}
% Hide following material on the current overlay.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pause{\@testopt\pd@p@use1}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@p@use}
% \oarg{steps}\\
% This inserts a |\pd@hide| that hides material for the following
% overlays, possibly some extra, when the optional argument is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@p@use[#1]{%
  \addtocounter{pd@pause}{#1}%
  \expandafter\pd@hide\expandafter{\the\c@pd@pause-}%
  \global\let\pd@revert\@gobble
  \ignorespaces
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@deloverlays}
% This macro disables overlays by redefining some internals.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@deloverlays{%
  \def\pd@hide##1{}%
  \def\pd@onslide##1##2{\@firstofone}%
  \let\@trivlist\pd@orig@@trivlist
  \let\endtrivlist\pd@orig@endtrivlist
  \def\pd@item[##1]<##2>{\pd@orig@item[##1]\leavevmode\ignorespaces}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% We insert an extra key in the |enumitem| family to allow for changing
% the type of the list. 0 uses ps hiding, 1 uses inactive color when
% items are inactive.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@cmdkey{enumitem}[pd@@]{type}{}
\setkeys{enumitem}{type=0}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@pdftrans}
% Inserts a pdf transition effect. It allows custom transition effects
% like wipes in different directions. But if you do that, it will warn
% that it might not work.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifxetex\else
  \def\pd@pdftrans{%
    \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\pd@@trans,}{%
      ,Split,Blinds,Box,Wipe,Dissolve,Glitter,%
      Replace,Fly,Push,Cover,Uncover,Fade,}%
    \ifin@\else
      \pd@warn{Transition `\pd@@trans' might not be understood by
        your ps to pdf converter}%
    \fi
    \pdfmark{%
      pdfmark=/PUT,%
      Raw={\string{ThisPage\string}%
        <</Trans << /S /\pd@@trans\space >> >>%
      }%
    }%
  }
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Two column keys.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@cmdkeys[pd]{twocolumn}[pd@@]{%
  lineheight,lfrheight,rfrheight,lcolwidth,rcolwidth,%
  topsep,bottomsep,indent,lineprop,lfrprop,rfrprop%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% We use two lengths as we need to do some computations with these
% key settings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key[pd]{twocolumn}{colsep}{\setlength\pd@colsep{#1}}
\define@key[pd]{twocolumn}{frsep}{\setlength\pd@frsep{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Presets.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\presetkeys[pd]{twocolumn}{frsep=1.5mm,colsep=.06\linewidth,%
  lcolwidth=.47\linewidth,rcolwidth=.47\linewidth,topsep=0cm,%
  bottomsep=0cm,indent=0cm,lineprop=,lfrprop=,rfrprop=,%
  lineheight=,lfrheight=,rfrheight=%
}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\twocolumn}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@twocolumn}
% Construct two columns and put material in it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\twocolumn{\@testopt\pd@twocolumn{}}
\long\def\pd@twocolumn[#1]#2#3{%
  \setkeys[pd]{twocolumn}{#1}%
  \sbox\pd@tba{\begin{minipage}\pd@@lcolwidth\pd@@textfont#2\end{minipage}}%
  \setlength\@tempdima{\the\ht\pd@tba}%
  \addtolength\@tempdima{\the\dp\pd@tba}%
  \sbox\pd@tbb{\begin{minipage}\pd@@rcolwidth\pd@@textfont#3\end{minipage}}%
  \setlength\@tempdimb{\the\ht\pd@tbb}%
  \addtolength\@tempdimb{\the\dp\pd@tbb}%
  \setlength\@tempdimc{\pd@maxdim\@tempdima\@tempdimb}%
  \ifx\pd@@lfrheight\@empty\else
    \setlength\@tempdimc{\pd@maxdim\pd@@lfrheight\@tempdimc}%
  \fi
  \ifx\pd@@lineheight\@empty\else
    \setlength\@tempdimc{\pd@maxdim\pd@@lineheight\@tempdimc}%
  \fi
  \ifx\pd@@rfrheight\@empty\else
    \setlength\@tempdimc{\pd@maxdim\pd@@rfrheight\@tempdimc}%
  \fi
  \begin{pspicture}(-\pd@@indent,\pd@@topsep)(\linewidth,-\@tempdimc)%
  \psset{linewidth=.25pt,linecolor=\pd@color}%
  \setlength\@tempdima\pd@@lcolwidth
  \addtolength\@tempdima\pd@frsep
  \ifx\pd@@lfrheight\@empty\else
    \expandafter\psframe\expandafter[\pd@@lfrprop]%
      (-\pd@frsep,\pd@frsep)(\@tempdima,-\pd@@lfrheight)%
  \fi
  \rput[tl](0,0){\usebox\pd@tba}%
  \setlength\@tempdima\pd@@lcolwidth
  \addtolength\@tempdima{.5\pd@colsep}%
  \ifx\pd@@lineheight\@empty\else
    \expandafter\psline\expandafter[\pd@@lineprop]%
      (\@tempdima,\pd@frsep)(\@tempdima,-\pd@@lineheight)%
  \fi
  \addtolength\@tempdima{.5\pd@colsep}%
  \setlength\@tempdimc\@tempdima
  \addtolength\@tempdima{-\pd@frsep}%
  \setlength\@tempdimb\@tempdima
  \addtolength\@tempdimb\pd@@rcolwidth
  \addtolength\@tempdimb{2\pd@frsep}%
  \ifx\pd@@rfrheight\@empty\else
    \expandafter\psframe\expandafter[\pd@@rfrprop]%
      (\@tempdima,\pd@frsep)(\@tempdimb,-\pd@@rfrheight)%
  \fi
  \rput[tl](\@tempdimc,0){\usebox\pd@tbb}%
  \end{pspicture}\par
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{environment}{figure}
% \begin{environment}{table}
% Avoid floating |figure| and |table| environments.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewenvironment{figure}[1][]{%
  \def\@captype{figure}%
  \par\begin{center}%
}{\par\end{center}}
\renewenvironment{table}[1][]{%
  \def\@captype{table}%
  \par\begin{center}%
}{\par\end{center}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
% \begin{macro}{\pddefinelyxtemplate}
% \meta{cs}\marg{template}
% Support for \LyX, where slides are delimited by an explicit |\lyxend|.
% This defines the \meta{cs} to look optional keys, the slide title
% and finally for |\lyxend| to collect the body of the slide.
% After that, it creates a slide with \meta{template}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pddefinelyxtemplate#1#2{\def#1{\pd@lyxgetargsandbody{#2}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@lyxgetargsandbody}
% \marg{template}\\
% Check for optional keys.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@lyxgetargsandbody#1{\@testopt{\pd@lyxget@rgsandbody{#1}}{}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@lyxget@rgsandbody}
% \marg{template}\oarg{options}\marg{title}\\
% This pretends to be an environment with name \meta{template}. The
% slide title and body are saved, keys are set and the slide is executed.
% This all happens in a local group to keep definitions (eg |toc| key)
% local. We again have three different methods to process the slide.
% Now, the verbatim version is more complicated as we have to look
% for |\lyxend| instead of |\end{slide}|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@lyxget@rgsandbody#1[#2]#3{%
  \begingroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% Initial settings and checks.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@currenvir{#1}%
  \pd@get@rgs@ndbody{#2}{#3}%
  \ifcase\ifnum\pd@method>\z@\ifpd@display\@ne\fi\fi\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Eat the body until |\lyxend|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \let\pd@tempa\pd@lyxget@rgs@ndbody
  \else
    \ifnum\pd@method=\@ne
      \def\pd@tempa{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Start writing to a temporary file and redefine |\verbatim@processline|
% to scan lines for |\lyxend|. We only stop if |\lyxend| occurs on the
% first character of the input line.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \immediate\openout\pd@vrbout\jobname.vrb\relax
        \def\verbatim@processline{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check for |\lyxend|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
          \pd@lyxget@rgs@ndb@dy
          \ifin@
%    \end{macrocode}
% If we found it, stop. |\pd@tempa| eats the next four tokens which
% would otherwise make \pf{verbatim} continue with reading.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            \let\pd@tempa\@gobblefour
%    \end{macrocode}
% |\next| occurs in the \pf{verbatim} macros. We define it to close
% the output file, execute the slide, write the remaining part of
% the line with |\lyxend| to file and read it back in. We need to
% do this as this content (probably |\lyxslide|) has been sanitized
% while reading in verbatim mode. We could also use |\scantokens|
% if we keep in mind that that, just as |\input|, introduces line
% feeds and end-of-file characters in the input stream which the
% \pf{verbatim} macros can't handle. Morten H\o gholm proposed the
% following instead.
%\begin{example}
% \documentclass{article}
% \begin{document}
% \long\def\ReinsertTokens#1{%
%   \begingroup\endlinechar=-1\everyeof{}%
%   \scantokens{\def\next{\endgroup#1}}\next
% }
% \ReinsertTokens{\begin{verbatim}}
% test
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{document}
%\end{example}
% We don't use that here as we don't want to force the use of
% $\varepsilon$-\TeX\ at this moment. Instead, we read back exactly
% one line via an input stream and execute that.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            \def\next{%
              \endgroup\immediate\closeout\pd@vrbout
              \let\verbatim@processline\pd@orig@verbatim@processline
              \pd@slide\endgroup
              \immediate\openout\pd@vrbout\jobname.vrb\relax
              \immediate\write\pd@vrbout{\pd@lyxrem}%
              \immediate\closeout\pd@vrbout
              \immediate\openin\pd@vrbout\jobname.vrb\relax
              \immediate\read\pd@vrbout to\pd@tempa
              \immediate\closein\pd@vrbout\pd@tempa
            }%
          \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Write a line of the body to file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            \immediate\write\pd@vrbout{\the\verbatim@line}%
            \let\pd@tempa\relax
          \fi
          \pd@tempa
        }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Start the verbatim reading.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \begingroup\let\do\@makeother\dospecials\catcode`\^^M\active
        \verbatim@start
      }%
    \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% This is the |direct| method, similar as before.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \pd@deloverlays
      \let\pd@tempa\pd@sl@de
      \def\lyxend{%
        \end{pd@minipage}\end{lrbox}%
        \ifx\pd@@textpos\@empty\else
          \rput[\pd@@texthook](\pd@@textpos){\usebox\pd@textbox}%
        \fi
        \endgroup
      }%
    \fi
  \fi
  \pd@tempa
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@lyxget@args@ndbody}
% \meta{body}|\lyxend|\\
% Collect material until |\lyxend|, save that in the token register
% and start processing the slide, if necessary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\pd@lyxget@rgs@ndbody#1\lyxend{%
  \pd@body{#1}%
  \ifpd@display\pd@slide\fi
  \endgroup
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup\lccode`\!`\\\lowercase{\endgroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@lyxget@args@ndb@dy}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@lyxget@args@ndb@dy}
% These macros check if |\lyxend| occurs in the input line (in
% sanitize version) and if so, if it occurs on the first character.
% That allows for including |\lyxend| somewhere in the line, for
% instance, in a verbatim text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@lyxget@rgs@ndb@dy{%
  \@expandtwoargs\in@{!lyxend}{\the\verbatim@line}%
  \ifin@\expandafter\pd@lyxget@rgs@ndb@d@\the\verbatim@line\@nil\fi
}
\def\pd@lyxget@rgs@ndb@d@#1!lyxend#2\@nil{%
  \ifx\@empty#1\@empty\gdef\pd@lyxrem{#2}\else\in@false\fi
}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\lyxend}
% This macro acts mainly as delimiter and doesn't need to be defined
% but we do it anyway as to make it harmless when there is a superfluous
% one in the file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\lyxend{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\lyxnote}
% \begin{macro}{\lyxslide}
% \begin{macro}{\lyxwideslide}
% \begin{macro}{\lyxemptyslide}
% These create the standard available templates. Any template can be
% supported for \LyX\ in this way.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\pddefinelyxtemplate\lyxnote{note}
\pddefinelyxtemplate\lyxslide{slide}
\pddefinelyxtemplate\lyxwideslide{wideslide}
\pddefinelyxtemplate\lyxemptyslide{emptyslide}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Solved \texttt{itemize} and \pf{frenchb} problem}
% Some compatibility things. We don't want \pf{frenchb} from
% \pf{babel} to redefine the |itemize| environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
  \@expandtwoargs\in@{,frenchb.ldf,}{,\@filelist,}%
  \ifin@
    \let\bbl@frenchindent\relax
    \let\bbl@frenchitemize\relax
    \let\bbl@frenchlistspacing\relax
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{environment}{thebibliography}
% Redefine the |thebibliography| environment. This is based on
% \pf{article}, but does not create marks or a section.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{%
    \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}{%
      \settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
      \leftmargin\labelwidth
      \advance\leftmargin\labelsep
      \@openbib@code
      \usecounter{enumiv}%
      \let\p@enumiv\@empty
      \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}%
    }%
    \sloppy
    \clubpenalty4000
    \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty
    \widowpenalty4000%
    \sfcode`\.\@m
  }{%
    \def\@noitemerr
     {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}%
    \endlist
  }%
  \@ifpackageloaded{CJK}{%
    \count@=127
    \@whilenum\count@<255\do{%
      \advance\count@\@ne
      \lccode`\~=\count@
      \catcode\count@=\active
      \lowercase{\def~{\kern1ex}}%
    }%
    \hypersetup{CJKbookmarks=true}%
  }{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%    \begin{macrocode}
}
\ifnum\pd@mode=\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\label}
% \begin{macro}{\label@in@display}
% \marg{name}\\
% We redefine these two macros (|\AtBeginDocument| for \pf{nameref}).
% For the current slide, we put all label names in a list. If the name
% reappears, we don't issue the original command anymore. This is necessary
% to avoid writing the same label multiple times because of overlays.
% This disables the check for multiply defined labels inside slides,
% but leaves this system in place over multiple slides. The latter
% macro is used in \pf{amsmath}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \AtBeginDocument{%
    \let\pd@orig@label\label
    \def\label{\pd@label\pd@orig@label}%
    \let\pd@orig@label@in@display\label@in@display
    \def\label@in@display{\pd@label\pd@orig@label@in@display}%
  }
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@label}
% \meta{label-macro}\marg{name}\\
% Helper macro that checks reappearance of labels on slides.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\pd@label#1#2{%
    \@expandtwoargs\in@{,#2,}{,\pd@labels,}%
    \ifin@\else
      \global\XKV@addtolist@x\pd@labels{#2}%
      #1{#2}%
    \fi
  }
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% No overlays in print of handout mode.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\else\pd@deloverlays\let\pd@pdftrans\relax\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% For handout mode, we make some redefinitions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\pd@mode=2
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@newpage}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@n@wpage}
% Alternate between making a |\newpage| and not. This results in
% two slides per page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@n@wpage{%
  \gdef\pd@newpage{%
    \global\let\pd@newpage\pd@n@wpage
    \newpage
  }%
}
\let\pd@newpage\pd@n@wpage
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@get@rgsandbody}
% \changes{v1.2}{2005/10/09}{Added \cs{@currentlabel} definition}
% \changes{v1.3}{2005/12/06}{Made body text \cs{raggedright}}
% \changes{v1.4}{2005/12/10}{Fixed \LyX\ handout mode}
% The new slide environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@get@rgsandbody#1[#2]#3{%
  \setkeys[pd]{glslide,slide}{#2}%
  \def\pd@t@tle{#3}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine to include this slide or not.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\pd@tempa{note}%
  \let\pd@resa\@currenvir
  \pd@displaytrue
  \ifcase\pd@display
    \ifx\pd@resa\pd@tempa\relax\pd@displayfalse\fi
  \or
    \ifx\pd@resa\pd@tempa\else\pd@displayfalse\fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% No bookmarks or targets for notes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\pd@resa\pd@tempa\else
    \stepcounter{slide}%
    \edef\@currentlabel{\the\c@slide}%
    \let\pd@tempb\@empty
    \pd@maketocbm0%
    \hyper@anchorstart{slide.\the\c@slide}\hyper@anchorend
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% For \LyX\ handout mode. Reset it immediately to avoid any problems
% with superfluous occurrences of |\lyxend|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \gdef\lyxend{\gdef\lyxend{}\pd@slide}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The |lrbox| will typeset and capture content. This allows for
% verbatim on slides.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \begin{lrbox}\pd@textbox
%    \end{macrocode}
% $16=2\times7+2\times1$.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@tempdima\linewidth
    \ifpd@@nohandoutframes\else
      \advance\@tempdima-16pt
    \fi
    \begin{minipage}\@tempdima
    \subsection*\pd@t@tle
%    \end{macrocode}
% This |\pd@displaytrue| only acts locally to make sure that |\endslide|
% is executed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \pd@displaytrue\raggedright
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@lyxget@rgsandbody}
% In \LyX\ handout mode, we start making slides in the same way as in
% \LaTeX\ handout mode, but in |\pd@get@rgsandbody|, we need to make
% |\lyxend| to finish the slide boxes which is normally done by
% |\end{slide}| (or friends).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\pd@lyxget@rgsandbody\pd@get@rgsandbody
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@slide}
% This creates the slide, if necessary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@slide{%
  \end{minipage}\end{lrbox}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If this slide should be visible, include it in a frame.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifpd@display
    \ifpd@@nohandoutframes
      \usebox\pd@textbox
    \else
      \fboxrule1pt\fboxsep7pt
      \fbox{\usebox\pd@textbox}%
    \fi
    \par\smallskip
    \pd@@lf\hfill\ifx\pd@@rf\@empty\else\pd@@rf\ -- \fi
    \def\pd@tempa{note}%
    \ifx\pd@resa\pd@tempa
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine if this is another note with the same slide.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \ifnum\c@slide=\pd@notet
        \stepcounter{note}%
      \else
        \setcounter{note}{1}%
      \fi
      \xdef\pd@notet{\the\c@slide}%
      \thenote
    \else\theslide\fi
    \par\bigskip
    \ifpd@@nohandoutpagebreaks\else\vfill\pd@newpage\fi
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@maketitle}
% Uses the original \pf{article} |\maketitle| and puts the table of
% contents below it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@maketitle[#1]{%
  \pd@orig@maketitle
  \vskip50pt
  \pd@puttoc0%
  \newpage
  \stepcounter{slide}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@pdcontentsline}
% \changes{v1.1}{2005/09/19}{Solved toc bug in handout mode}
% \marg{type}\marg{target}\marg{title}\\
% Make table of contents entries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@pdcontentsline#1#2#3{%
  \ifnum#1=\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Slide.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\@tempcntb>\z@\hskip15pt\fi
    \hyperlink{slide.#2}{#3}%
    \leaders\hbox{\hss.\ \hss}\hfill#2\par
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Section.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \if@tempswa\else\vskip10pt\fi
    \hyperlink{slide.#2}{\bfseries#3}%
    {\hfill\bfseries#2}\par
    \global\advance\@tempcntb\@ne
  \fi
  \@tempswafalse
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@section}
% \oarg{options}\marg{title}\\
% Like before, but simplified.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@section[#1]#2{%
  \begingroup
    \setkeys*[pd]{section}{#1}%
    \setrmkeys*[pd]{slide}%
    \def\pd@tempa{%
      \stepcounter{slide}%
      \def\pd@t@tle{#2}%
      \pd@maketocbm\pd@tempb
      \hyper@anchorstart{slide.\the\c@slide}\hyper@anchorend
      \pd@orig@section*{#2\normalfont\hfill\theslide}%
    }%
    \ifnum\pd@display=\@ne\ifpd@@slide\stepcounter{slide}\fi\else
      \ifnum\pd@tempb=\z@
        \ifpd@@slide\pd@tempa\fi
      \else
        \stepcounter{pd@section}%
        \pd@tempa
        \ifpd@@slide\else\addtocounter{slide}\m@ne\fi
      \fi
    \fi
  \endgroup
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% End of handout mode specific definitions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here follow some miscellaneous utility macros.
% \begin{macro}{\@nameedef}
% \marg{csname}\\
% Similar as |\@namedef|, but uses |\edef| to define the command with
% name \meta{csname}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@nameedef#1{\expandafter\edef\csname#1\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@namelet}
% \marg{cs1}\marg{cs2}\\
% Copy the replacement text of macro with name \meta{cs2} to the macro
% with name \meta{cs1}. We use a private version as |\@namelet| has
% many conflicting definitions is different packages.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@namelet#1#2{%
  \expandafter\let\csname#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname#2\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@pop}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@p@p}
% \meta{list}\meta{cmd}
% Remove the first element of a comma separated \meta{list} and store
% that in \meta{cmd}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@pop#1#2{%
  \@expandtwoargs\in@{,}{#1}%
  \ifin@\expandafter\pd@p@p#1\@nil#2#1\else\let#2#1\let#1\@empty\fi
}
\def\pd@p@p#1,#2\@nil#3#4{\def#3{#1}\def#4{#2}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@maxdim}
% \marg{dim1}\marg{dim2}\\
% Compute the maximum of two dimensions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@maxdim#1#2{\ifdim#1>#2#1\else#2\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@minipage}
% \begin{macro}{\endpd@minipage}
% Adapted version of the |minipage| environment to do normal footnote
% typesetting.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pd@minipage{%
  \leavevmode
  \@pboxswfalse
  \setlength\@tempdima\pd@@textwidth
  \def\@mpargs{{t}{\pd@@textheight}[t]{\pd@@textwidth}}%
  \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
    \color@begingroup
      \hsize\@tempdima
      \textwidth\hsize
      \columnwidth\hsize
      \@parboxrestore
      \let\@footnotetext\@mpfootnotetext
      \let\@listdepth\@mplistdepth
      \@mplistdepth\z@
      \@minipagerestore
      \@setminipage
}
\def\endpd@minipage{%
    \par
    \unskip
    \ifvoid\@mpfootins\else
      \vfill
      \normalcolor
      \footnoterule
      \unvbox\@mpfootins
    \fi
    \@minipagefalse
  \color@endgroup
  \egroup
  \expandafter\@iiiparbox\@mpargs{\unvbox\@tempboxa}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pd@orig@verbatim@processline}
% Backup of |\verbatim@processline| for restoring after verbatim
% reading of the body of a slide.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\pd@orig@verbatim@processline\verbatim@processline
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\psds@ocircle}
% \begin{macro}{\psds@osquare}
% Two macros for open circle and open square dots by Herbert Vo\ss.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\psds@ocircle{\pst@gdot{ 0 0 DS 0 360 arc stroke }}
\def\psds@osquare{%
  \pst@gdot{
    DS .886 mul /r ED
    r r moveto r r neg L r neg r neg L r neg r L
    closepath stroke }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% Load style.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\IfFileExists{powerdot-\pd@@style.sty}{
  \RequirePackage{powerdot-\pd@@style}
}{
  \pd@error{unknown style `\pd@@style'}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check integrity of the style file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\titleslide\@undefined
  \pd@error{`titleslide' environment
    not defined by style `\pd@@style'}
\fi
\ifx\slide\@undefined
  \pd@error{`slide' environment not
    defined by style `\pd@@style'}
\fi
\ifx\pd@title\@undefined\let\pd@title\@firstofone\fi
\ifx\pd@slidetitle\@undefined\let\pd@slidetitle\@firstofone\fi
\ifx\pd@sectiontitle\@undefined\let\pd@sectiontitle\@firstofone\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define the standard ways to make toc entries and highlighted entries.
% We do this here so that designers could use |\newcommand| or |\def|
% in the style file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\pd@tocdisplay\@undefined
  \def\pd@tocdisplay#1{%
    \hskip\@tempdima
    \begin{minipage}[b]\@tempdimb
      \pd@usedtocfont\color\pd@@toctcolor#1%
    \end{minipage}%
  }
\fi
\ifx\pd@tochighlight\@undefined
  \def\pd@tochighlight#1{%
    \psframebox*[framesep=\pd@@tocfrsep,%
      fillcolor=\pd@@tochlcolor,boxsep=false]{%
      \hskip\@tempdima
      \begin{minipage}[b]\@tempdimb
        \pd@usedtocfont\color\pd@@tochltcolor#1%
      \end{minipage}%
    }%
  }
\fi
\ifx\pd@tocslide\@undefined\let\pd@tocslide\@firstofone\fi
\ifx\pd@tocsection\@undefined\let\pd@tocsection\@firstofone\fi
%</powerdot>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \Finale
% \endinput
%
%<*pddefault>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-default}[2014/01/01 v1.5 default style (HA)]
\RequirePackage{pifont}
\definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.17,.31,.44}
\definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.75,.85,.92}
\definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.9,.95,.98}
\pddefinepalettes{blue}{}{red}{
  \colorlet{pdcolor1}{pdcolor1>wheel,150}
  \colorlet{pdcolor2}{pdcolor2>wheel,150}
  \colorlet{pdcolor3}{pdcolor3>wheel,150}
}{green}{
  \colorlet{pdcolor1}{pdcolor1>wheel,290}
  \colorlet{pdcolor2}{pdcolor2>wheel,290}
  \colorlet{pdcolor3}{pdcolor3>wheel,290}
}{yellow}{
  \colorlet{pdcolor1}{pdcolor1>wheel,-150}
  \colorlet{pdcolor2}{pdcolor2>wheel,-150}
  \colorlet{pdcolor3}{pdcolor3>wheel,-150}
}{brown}{
  \colorlet{pdcolor1}{pdcolor1>wheel,180}
  \colorlet{pdcolor2}{pdcolor2>wheel,180}
  \colorlet{pdcolor3}{pdcolor3>wheel,180}
}{purple}{
  \colorlet{pdcolor1}{pdcolor1>wheel,45}
  \colorlet{pdcolor2}{pdcolor2>wheel,45}
  \colorlet{pdcolor3}{pdcolor3>wheel,45}
}
\newbox\pd@imagebox
\pdifsetup{landscape}{%
  \sbox\pd@imagebox{\includegraphics[trim=50 20 0 20,clip,%
    width=.17\slidewidth,height=.1\slideheight]{powerdot-default.ps}%
  }%
}{%
  \sbox\pd@imagebox{\includegraphics[trim=170 0 80 0,clip,%
    height=.1\slideheight]{powerdot-default.ps}%
  }%
}
\pddefinetemplate{titleslide}{%
  titlefont=\large\bfseries\centering,
  clockcolor=pdcolor1,clockpos={.99\slidewidth,\slideheight},
  lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  texthook=t,textpos={.5\slidewidth,.7\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth,textfont=\centering,
  textheight=.6\slideheight
}{%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor3,linewidth=0pt]%
    (0,.8\slideheight)(\slidewidth,0)%
  \psline[linecolor=pdcolor1]%
    (0,.8\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.8\slideheight)%
}
\pddefinetemplate{basic}{%
  titlepos={.2\slidewidth,.93\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.75\slidewidth,textheight=.68\slideheight,
  titlefont=\large\bfseries\raggedright,
  clockcolor=pdcolor1,clockpos={.99\slidewidth,\slideheight},
  lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  tocslidesep=.6ex,
  toctcolor=pdcolor1,
  tochlcolor=pdcolor1,
  tochltcolor=pdcolor3,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    textpos={.05\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    textwidth=.9\slidewidth,
    tocsecsep=.6ex,
    stochook=tr,stocpos={.48\slidewidth,.09\slideheight},
    stocfont=\tiny\raggedleft,
    ntocpos={.52\slidewidth,.09\slideheight},
  ifsetup=landscape,
    textpos={.2\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    textwidth=.75\slidewidth
}{%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor3,linewidth=0pt]%
    (0,\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.9\slideheight)%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor2,linewidth=0pt]%
    (0,0)(\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
  \rput[tl](0,\slideheight){\usebox\pd@imagebox}%
}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{wideslide}{%
  textpos={.05\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{slide}{%
  ifsetup=landscape,
    tocpos={.015\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    tocwidth=.14\slidewidth,
    tocsecm={\psline[linewidth=.5pt,linecolor=pdcolor1]%
      (-.05,-.05)(.143\slidewidth,-.05)}
}{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=pdcolor3,linestyle=none,%
      linewidth=0pt](0,.9\slideheight)(.17\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
  }{}%
}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{sectionslide}{%
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.575\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlewidth=.9\slidewidth,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight}
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[wideslide]{sectionwideslide}{%
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering,
  titlewidth=.9\slidewidth,
  titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight}
}{}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{%
  sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionwideslide
}
\def\labelitemi{\footnotesize\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemii{\small\ding{117}}
\def\labelitemiii{\tiny\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemiv{\tiny\ding{117}}
\pdsetup{
  list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
}
\def\rmdefault{cmss}
%</pddefault>
%
%<*pdtycja>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-tycja}[2005/12/10 v1.4 tycja style (HA)]
\RequirePackage{pifont}
\RequirePackage{pst-grad}
\pddefinepalettes{default}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.09,.27,.47}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{1,.81,.42}
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{1,.97,.84}
}
\pddefinetemplate{basic}{
  lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  lffont=\scriptsize\color{pdcolor3},
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  cffont=\scriptsize\color{pdcolor3},
  rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  rffont=\scriptsize\color{pdcolor3},
  clockcolor=pdcolor1,clockhook=tl,clockalign=0,
  clockpos={0,\slideheight},
  tocslidesep=.6ex,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    textheight=.66\slideheight,
    toctcolor=pdcolor1,
    tochlcolor=pdcolor1,
    tochltcolor=pdcolor3,
    tocpos={.845\slidewidth,.81\slideheight},
    tocwidth=.14\slidewidth,
    tocsecm={\psline[linewidth=.5pt,linecolor=pdcolor1]%
      (-.05,-.05)(.143\slidewidth,-.05)},
  ifsetup=portrait,
    toctcolor=pdcolor3,
    tochlcolor=pdcolor3,
    tochltcolor=pdcolor1,
    tocsecsep=.6ex,
    textheight=.68\slideheight,
    stochook=tr,stocpos={.48\slidewidth,.09\slideheight},
    stocfont=\tiny\raggedleft,
    ntocpos={.52\slidewidth,.09\slideheight}
}{%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor3](0,0)(\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor1](0,0)(\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
  \psline[linecolor=pdcolor1]%
    (0,.85\slideheight)(.1\slidewidth,.85\slideheight)%
    (.1\slidewidth,.88\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.88\slideheight)%
}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{titleslide}{
  titlefont=\large\bfseries\centering,texthook=t,
  textpos={.5\slidewidth,.7\slideheight},
  textwidth=.75\slidewidth,textfont=\centering,
  textheight=.55\slideheight,
  ifsetup=landscape,tocpos,ifsetup=portrait,stocpos,ntocpos
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{slide}{
  titlehook=Br,titlepos={.81\slidewidth,.93\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.76\slidewidth,titlefont=\large\bfseries\raggedleft,
  textpos={.12\slidewidth,.81\slideheight},textwidth=.67\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.9\slidewidth,.93\slideheight},titlewidth=.88\slidewidth,
    textwidth=.76\slidewidth
}{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe[linestyle=none,fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2,%
      gradend=pdcolor3,gradmidpoint=1,linewidth=0pt]%
      (\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)(.83\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  }{%
    \psframe[linestyle=none,fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2,%
      gradend=pdcolor3,gradmidpoint=1,linewidth=0pt]%
      (\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)(.92\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  }%
}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{wideslide}{
  titlehook=Br,titlepos={.81\slidewidth,.93\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.76\slidewidth,titlefont=\large\bfseries\raggedleft,
  textpos={.12\slidewidth,.81\slideheight},textwidth=.84\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=landscape,tocpos,ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.9\slidewidth,.93\slideheight},titlewidth=.88\slidewidth,
}{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe[linestyle=none,fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2,%
      gradend=pdcolor3,gradmidpoint=1,linewidth=0pt]%
      (\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)(.83\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
    \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor3]%
      (.79\slidewidth,.88\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
  }{%
    \psframe[linestyle=none,fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2,%
      gradend=pdcolor3,gradmidpoint=1,linewidth=0pt]%
      (\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)(.92\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
    \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor3]%
      (.9\slidewidth,.88\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
  }%
  \psline[linecolor=pdcolor1]%
    (0,.85\slideheight)(.1\slidewidth,.85\slideheight)%
    (.1\slidewidth,.88\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.88\slideheight)%
}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{sectionslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.455\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.67\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.76\slidewidth
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[wideslide]{sectionwideslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering,
  titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.76\slidewidth
}{}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
\def\labelitemi{\footnotesize\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemii{\small\ding{117}}
\def\labelitemiii{\tiny\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemiv{\tiny\ding{117}}
\pdsetup{
  list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
}
\def\rmdefault{cmss}
%</pdtycja>
%
%<*pdikeda>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-ikeda}[2005/12/10 v1.4 ikeda style (CE,HA)]
\RequirePackage{calc}
\RequirePackage{pifont}
\pddefinepalettes{default}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.941,.98,1}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.435,.031,.165}
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.051,.094,.29}
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.051,.329,.29}
}
\pddefinetemplate{titleslide}{
  titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering,
  clockcolor=pdcolor1,clockpos={.99\slidewidth,\slideheight},
  textpos={.13\slidewidth,.7\slideheight},
  textwidth=.75\slidewidth,
  textfont=\centering,
  textheight=.56\slideheight
}{%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor2](0,\slideheight)(\slidewidth,0)%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor3]%
    (.05\slidewidth,.95\slideheight)(.95\slidewidth,.05\slideheight)%
  \psline[linecolor=pdcolor1,linewidth=.01]%
    (.1\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)(.1\slidewidth,.9\slideheight)%
  \psline[linecolor=pdcolor1,linewidth=.01]%
    (.9\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)(.9\slidewidth,.9\slideheight)%
  \pspolygon[linestyle=none,fillstyle=vlines*,fillcolor=pdcolor2,%
    hatchcolor=pdcolor1,hatchwidth=.1\pslinewidth,hatchsep=4pt]%
    (.1\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)(.25\slidewidth,.07\slideheight)%
    (.5\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)(.75\slidewidth,.13\slideheight)%
    (.9\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
  \pspolygon[linestyle=none,fillstyle=hlines*,fillcolor=pdcolor2,%
    hatchcolor=pdcolor1,hatchwidth=.1\pslinewidth,hatchsep=4pt]%
    (.1\slidewidth,.9\slideheight)(.25\slidewidth,.93\slideheight)%
    (.5\slidewidth,.9\slideheight)(.75\slidewidth,.87\slideheight)%
    (.9\slidewidth,.9\slideheight)%
}
\pddefinetemplate{basic}{
  titlehook=Bc,titlefont=\large\bfseries\centering,
  clockcolor=pdcolor1,clockpos={.99\slidewidth,\slideheight},
  tocslidesep=.6ex,
  toctcolor=pdcolor1,
  tochlcolor=pdcolor3,
  tochltcolor=pdcolor1,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    tocsecsep=.6ex,
    textpos={.05\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    textwidth=.9\slidewidth,
    lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.025\slideheight},
    cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.025\slideheight},
    rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.025\slideheight},
    stochook=tr,stocpos={.47\slidewidth,.15\slideheight},
    stocfont=\tiny\raggedleft,
    ntocpos={.53\slidewidth,.15\slideheight},
  ifsetup=landscape,
    textpos={.2\slidewidth,.84\slideheight},
    textwidth=.75\slidewidth,
    lfpos={.19\slidewidth,.025\slideheight},
    cfpos={.58\slidewidth,.025\slideheight},
    rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.025\slideheight}
}{%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor3](0,0)(\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{slide}{
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlewidth=.75\slidewidth,
    titlepos={.575\slidewidth,.92\slideheight},
    tocpos={.01\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    tocwidth=.14\slidewidth,
    tocsecm={\psline[linewidth=.5pt,linecolor=pdcolor3](-.05,-.05)(.143\slidewidth,-.05)},
    textheight=.72\slideheight,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.88\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.95\slidewidth,
    textheight=.64\slideheight
}{{%
  \psset{linestyle=none}%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor2](0,0)(.16\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
    \setlength\@tempdima{.16\slidewidth-.4cm}%
    \setlength\@tempdimb{.97\slideheight-.8cm}%
    \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor3]%
      (.16\slidewidth,.97\slideheight)(\@tempdima,\@tempdimb)%
    \setlength\@tempdima{.16\slidewidth+.4cm}%
    \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor2]%
      (.16\slidewidth,.97\slideheight)(\@tempdima,\@tempdimb)%
    \pspolygon[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=pdcolor3]%
      (0,.935\slideheight)(.02\slidewidth,.945\slideheight)%
      (.065\slidewidth,.935\slideheight)(.11\slidewidth,.925\slideheight)%
      (.13\slidewidth,.935\slideheight)%
    \pspolygon[fillstyle=hlines*,fillcolor=pdcolor2,%
      hatchcolor=pdcolor1,hatchwidth=.1\pslinewidth,hatchsep=4pt]%
      (.185\slidewidth,.09\slideheight)(.335\slidewidth,.06\slideheight)%
      (.58\slidewidth,.09\slideheight)%
    \pspolygon[fillstyle=vlines*,fillcolor=pdcolor2,%
      hatchcolor=pdcolor1,hatchwidth=.1\pslinewidth,hatchsep=4pt]%
      (.58\slidewidth,.09\slideheight)(.825\slidewidth,.06\slideheight)%
      (.975\slidewidth,.09\slideheight)%
  }{%
    \pspolygon[fillstyle=vlines*,fillcolor=pdcolor2,%
      hatchcolor=pdcolor1,hatchwidth=.1\pslinewidth,hatchsep=4pt]%
      (.02\slidewidth,.95\slideheight)(.17\slidewidth,.98\slideheight)%
      (.5\slidewidth,.95\slideheight)%
    \pspolygon[fillstyle=hlines*,fillcolor=pdcolor2,%
      hatchcolor=pdcolor1,hatchwidth=.1\pslinewidth,hatchsep=4pt]%
      (.5\slidewidth,.95\slideheight)(.82\slidewidth,.98\slideheight)%
      (.98\slidewidth,.95\slideheight)%
    \pd@ikedapbg
  }%
}}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{wideslide}{
  lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.025\slideheight},
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.025\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.95\slidewidth,
  textwidth=.95\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.88\slideheight},
    textpos={.025\slidewidth,.84\slideheight},
    textheight=.72\slideheight,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.92\slideheight},
    textpos={.025\slidewidth,.87\slideheight},
    textheight=.68\slideheight
}{{%
  \psset{linestyle=none}%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \pspolygon[fillstyle=vlines*,fillcolor=pdcolor2,%
      hatchcolor=pdcolor1,hatchwidth=.1\pslinewidth,hatchsep=4pt]%
      (.02\slidewidth,.95\slideheight)(.17\slidewidth,.98\slideheight)%
      (.5\slidewidth,.95\slideheight)%
    \pspolygon[fillstyle=hlines*,fillcolor=pdcolor2,%
      hatchcolor=pdcolor1,hatchwidth=.1\pslinewidth,hatchsep=4pt]%
      (.5\slidewidth,.95\slideheight)(.83\slidewidth,.98\slideheight)%
      (.98\slidewidth,.95\slideheight)%
    \pspolygon[fillstyle=hlines*,fillcolor=pdcolor2,%
      hatchcolor=pdcolor1,hatchwidth=.1\pslinewidth,hatchsep=4pt]%
      (.02\slidewidth,.09\slideheight)(.17\slidewidth,.06\slideheight)%
      (.5\slidewidth,.09\slideheight)%
    \pspolygon[fillstyle=vlines*,fillcolor=pdcolor2,%
      hatchcolor=pdcolor1,hatchwidth=.1\pslinewidth,hatchsep=4pt]%
      (.5\slidewidth,.09\slideheight)(.83\slidewidth,.06\slideheight)%
      (.98\slidewidth,.09\slideheight)%
  }\pd@ikedapbg
}}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{sectionslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\large\bfseries\centering,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.575\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.75\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.9\slidewidth
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[wideslide]{sectionwideslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\large\bfseries\centering,
  titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.9\slidewidth
}{}
\def\pd@ikedapbg{%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor2](0,0)(\slidewidth,.17\slideheight)%
  \pspolygon[fillstyle=vlines*,fillcolor=pdcolor2,%
    hatchcolor=pdcolor3,hatchwidth=.1\pslinewidth,hatchsep=1.6pt]%
    (.05\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)(.08\slidewidth,.08\slideheight)%
    (.14\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)(.20\slidewidth,.12\slideheight)%
    (.23\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
  \pspolygon[fillstyle=hlines*,fillcolor=pdcolor2,%
    hatchcolor=pdcolor3,hatchwidth=.1\pslinewidth,hatchsep=1.6pt]%
    (.77\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)(.80\slidewidth,.12\slideheight)%
    (.86\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)(.92\slidewidth,.08\slideheight)%
    (.95\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
\def\labelitemi{\color{pdcolor2}\footnotesize\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemii{\color{pdcolor4}\small\ding{115}}
\def\labelitemiii{\color{pdcolor2}\tiny\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemiv{\color{pdcolor4}\tiny\ding{115}}
\pdsetup{
  list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
}
\def\rmdefault{cmss}
%</pdikeda>
%
%<*pdfyma>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-fyma}[2005/12/10 v1.3 fyma style (SA,HA)]
\RequirePackage{pst-grad}
\definecolor{fymahltcolor}{rgb}{1,0,0}
\pddefinepalettes{blue}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.14,.34,.55}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.24,.45,.7}
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.88,.95,1}
}{green}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.1,.45,.3}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.24,.7,.45}
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.88,1,.9}
}{gray}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{gray}{0.25}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{gray}{0.55}
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{gray}{0.85}
}{brown}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.52,.32,.12}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.7,.45,.24}
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.97,.92,.92}
}{orange}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.8,.23,.24}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.95,.53,.44}
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{1,.92,.87}
  \definecolor{fymahltcolor}{rgb}{.23,.25,.5}
}
\pddefinetemplate{basic}{
  titlefont=\large\bfseries\raggedright,
  clockpos={.96\slidewidth,.97\slideheight},clockcolor=pdcolor1,
  tocslidesep=.6ex,
  toctcolor=pdcolor1,
  tochlcolor=pdcolor1,
  tochltcolor=fymahltcolor,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    textheight=.67\slideheight,
    titlepos={.06\slidewidth,.9\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.75\slidewidth,
    textpos={.09\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    textwidth=.85\slidewidth,
    tocsecsep=.6ex,
    stochook=tr,stocpos={.48\slidewidth,.12\slideheight},
    stocfont=\tiny\raggedleft,
    ntochook=tl,ntocpos={.52\slidewidth,.12\slideheight},
    lfpos={.06\slidewidth,.045\slideheight},
    cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.045\slideheight},
    rfpos={.94\slidewidth,.045\slideheight},
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.205\slidewidth,.9\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.75\slidewidth,
    textheight=.72\slideheight,
    textpos={.23\slidewidth,.82\slideheight},
    textwidth=.72\slidewidth,
    lfpos={.04\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
    cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
    rfpos={.96\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
    tocpos={.04\slidewidth,.82\slideheight},
    tocwidth=.14\slidewidth,
    tocsecm={\psline[linewidth=.5pt,linecolor=pdcolor1]%
      (-.05,-.05)(.143\slidewidth,-.05)}
}{{%
  \psset{linewidth=.8pt,linecolor=pdcolor2}%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
  \psframe[linestyle=none,fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor3,%
    gradend=white,gradmidpoint=0,dimen=outer]%
    (.03\slidewidth,.97\slideheight)(.97\slidewidth,.055\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.02\slidewidth,.055\slideheight)(.98\slidewidth,.055\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.03\slidewidth,.07\slideheight)(.03\slidewidth,.045\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.97\slidewidth,.07\slideheight)(.97\slidewidth,.045\slideheight)%
  }{%
  \psframe[linestyle=none,fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=white,%
    gradend=pdcolor3,gradmidpoint=.85,dimen=outer]%
    (.03\slidewidth,.97\slideheight)(.97\slidewidth,.03\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.02\slidewidth,.03\slideheight)(.98\slidewidth,.03\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.03\slidewidth,.045\slideheight)(.03\slidewidth,.02\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.97\slidewidth,.045\slideheight)(.97\slidewidth,.02\slideheight)%
  }%
  \psline
    (.02\slidewidth,.97\slideheight)(.98\slidewidth,.97\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.03\slidewidth,.98\slideheight)(.03\slidewidth,.955\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.97\slidewidth,.98\slideheight)(.97\slidewidth,.955\slideheight)%
}}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{titleslide}{
  texthook=t,textpos={.5\slidewidth,.7\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth,textfont=\centering,
  textheight=.6\slideheight,
  titlefont=\large\bfseries\centering,tocpos,ntocpos,stocpos
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{slide}{}{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
  \psframe[fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor3,gradend=white,%
    gradmidpoint=1,linestyle=none,dimen=outer,linewidth=.8pt]%
    (.03\slidewidth,.97\slideheight)(.195\slidewidth,.055\slideheight)%
  }{}%
}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{wideslide}{
  ifsetup=landscape,tocpos,
    titlepos={.055\slidewidth,.9\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.75\slidewidth,
    textpos={.07\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    textwidth=.83\slidewidth
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{sectionslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.59\slidewidth,.525\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.5\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.525\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.68\slidewidth
}{{%
  \psset{linewidth=.8pt,linecolor=pdcolor2}%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
  \psframe[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=white,linestyle=none,dimen=outer]%
    (.34\slidewidth,.65\slideheight)(.84\slidewidth,.4\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.33\slidewidth,.65\slideheight)(.85\slidewidth,.65\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.33\slidewidth,.4\slideheight)(.85\slidewidth,.4\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.34\slidewidth,.635\slideheight)(.34\slidewidth,.66\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.34\slidewidth,.39\slideheight)(.34\slidewidth,.415\slideheight)%
  }{%
  \psframe[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=white,linestyle=none,dimen=outer]%
    (.16\slidewidth,.65\slideheight)(.84\slidewidth,.4\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.15\slidewidth,.65\slideheight)(.85\slidewidth,.65\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.15\slidewidth,.4\slideheight)(.85\slidewidth,.4\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.16\slidewidth,.635\slideheight)(.16\slidewidth,.66\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.16\slidewidth,.39\slideheight)(.16\slidewidth,.415\slideheight)%
  }%
  \psline
    (.84\slidewidth,.635\slideheight)(.84\slidewidth,.66\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.84\slidewidth,.39\slideheight)(.84\slidewidth,.415\slideheight)%
}}
\pddefinetemplate[wideslide]{sectionwideslide}{%
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering,
  titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.525\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.68\slidewidth
}{{%
  \psset{linewidth=.8pt,linecolor=pdcolor2}%
  \psframe[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=white,linestyle=none,dimen=outer]%
    (.16\slidewidth,.65\slideheight)(.84\slidewidth,.4\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.15\slidewidth,.65\slideheight)(.85\slidewidth,.65\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.15\slidewidth,.4\slideheight)(.85\slidewidth,.4\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.16\slidewidth,.635\slideheight)(.16\slidewidth,.66\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.16\slidewidth,.39\slideheight)(.16\slidewidth,.415\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.84\slidewidth,.635\slideheight)(.84\slidewidth,.66\slideheight)%
  \psline
    (.84\slidewidth,.39\slideheight)(.84\slidewidth,.415\slideheight)%
}}
\def\pd@slidetitle#1{%
  \settowidth\@tempdima{#1}%
  \ifdim\@tempdima>\pd@@titlewidth\@tempdima\pd@@titlewidth\fi
  \psline[linewidth=.8pt,linecolor=pdcolor1]%
    (0,-.15cm)(\@tempdima,-.15cm)%
  \parbox[b]\pd@@titlewidth{#1}%
}
\def\pd@tochighlight#1{%
  \begin{minipage}[b]\pd@@tocwidth
    \pd@usedtocfont\color\pd@@tochltcolor#1%
  \end{minipage}%
}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
\pdifsetup{landscape}{\def\pd@tocslide#1{{\tiny\ensuremath\bullet} #1}}{}
\def\labelitemi{\small\ensuremath\bullet}
\def\labelitemii{\small\ensuremath\circ}
\def\labelitemiii{\scriptsize\ensuremath\bullet}
\def\labelitemiv{\scriptsize\ensuremath\circ}
\pdsetup{
  list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
}
\def\rmdefault{phv}
\def\sfdefault{phv}
\def\Hv@scale{.86}
%</pdfyma>
%
%<*pdsimple>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-simple}[2005/12/10 v1.3 simple style (HA)]
\RequirePackage{pifont}
\RequirePackage{amssymb}
\pddefinepalettes{default}{\colorlet{pdcolor1}{black}}
\pddefinetemplate{titleslide}{
  titlefont=\large\bfseries\raggedright,
  clockpos={.99\slidewidth,\slideheight},
  lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  texthook=tl,textpos={.05\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth,textfont=\tabcolsep0pt,
  textheight=.66\slideheight
}{%
  \psline[linewidth=.8pt](0,.9\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.9\slideheight)%
  \psline[linewidth=.8pt](0,.1\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
}
\pddefinetemplate{basic}{
  titlepos={.05\slidewidth,.93\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.9\slidewidth,textheight=.66\slideheight,
  titlefont=\large\bfseries\raggedright,
  clockpos={.99\slidewidth,\slideheight},
  lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  tocslidesep=.6ex,textheight=.68\slideheight,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    textpos={.05\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    textwidth=.9\slidewidth,
    tocsecsep=.6ex,
    stochook=tr,stocpos={.48\slidewidth,.09\slideheight},
    stocfont=\tiny\raggedleft,
    ntocpos={.52\slidewidth,.09\slideheight},
  ifsetup=landscape,
    textpos={.2\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    textwidth=.75\slidewidth
}{%
  \psline[linewidth=.8pt](0,.9\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.9\slideheight)%
  \psline[linewidth=.8pt](0,.1\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{wideslide}{
  textpos={.05\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{slide}{
  ifsetup=landscape,
    tocpos={.015\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    tocwidth=.14\slidewidth,
    tocsecm={\psline[linewidth=.5pt,linecolor=gray]%
      (-.05,-.05)(.143\slidewidth,-.05)}
}{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=black!10,linestyle=none,%
      linewidth=.8pt](-.01\slidewidth,.9\slideheight)%
      (.17\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
  }{}%
}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{sectionslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.575\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.75\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.9\slidewidth
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[wideslide]{sectionwideslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering,
  titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.9\slidewidth
}{}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
\def\pd@tochighlight#1{\pd@tocsimple\phantom{#1}}
\def\pd@tochighlight#1{\pd@tocsimple\@firstofone{#1}}
\def\pd@tocsimple#1#2{%
  \@tempdima\pd@@tocwidth
  \settowidth\@tempdimb{\normalsize\ensuremath\triangleright\hskip1mm}%
  \advance\@tempdima-\@tempdimb
  \ifnum\pd@toctype=\@ne\else
    #1{\normalsize\ensuremath\triangleright\hskip1mm}%
  \fi
  \begin{minipage}[b]\@tempdima
    \pd@usedtocfont#2%
  \end{minipage}%
  \ifnum\pd@toctype=\@ne
    #1{\hskip1mm\normalsize\ensuremath\triangleleft}%
  \fi
}
\def\labelitemi{\footnotesize\ensuremath\square}
\def\labelitemii{\small--}
\def\labelitemiii{\tiny\ensuremath\triangleright}
\def\labelitemiv{\tiny\ding{110}}
\pdsetup{
  list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
}
\def\rmdefault{cmss}
%</pdsimple>
%
%<*pdciment>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-ciment}[2005/12/10 v1.3 ciment style (HA)]
\RequirePackage{pifont}
\pddefinepalettes{default}{
  \colorlet{pdcolor1}{black}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.7,.1,.1}
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.2,.2,.2}
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.75,.75,.75}
}
\pddefinetemplate{basic}{
  titlepos={.1\slidewidth,.93\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.85\slidewidth,
  titlefont=\color{pdcolor2}\large\bfseries\raggedright,
  clockpos={.99\slidewidth,\slideheight},
  lfpos={.05\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  lffont=\color{pdcolor3}\scriptsize,
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  cffont=\color{pdcolor3}\scriptsize,
  rfpos={.95\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  rffont=\color{pdcolor3}\scriptsize,
  tocslidesep=.6ex,
  toctcolor=black,
  tochlcolor=pdcolor2,
  tochltcolor=white,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    textpos={.05\slidewidth,.85\slideheight},
    textwidth=.9\slidewidth,textheight=.68\slideheight,
    tocsecsep=.6ex,
    stochook=tr,stocpos={.48\slidewidth,.13\slideheight},
    stocfont=\tiny\raggedleft,
    ntocpos={.52\slidewidth,.13\slideheight},
  ifsetup=landscape,
    textpos={.2\slidewidth,.85\slideheight},
    textwidth=.75\slidewidth,textheight=.7\slideheight
}{%
  \psframe[linewidth=0pt,linestyle=none,fillstyle=hlines,%
    hatchwidth=.4pt,hatchangle=0,hatchcolor=pdcolor4]%
    (0,0)(\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psline[linecolor=pdcolor2](.05\slidewidth,.09\slideheight)%
      (.95\slidewidth,.09\slideheight)%
  }{%
    \psline[linecolor=pdcolor2](.05\slidewidth,.15\slideheight)%
      (.95\slidewidth,.15\slideheight)%
  }%
}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{titleslide}{
  titlefont=\color{pdcolor2}\large\bfseries\centering,
  texthook=t,textpos={.5\slidewidth,.7\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth,textfont=\centering,
  textheight=.6\slideheight,titlepos,
  ifsetup=portrait,textheight=.53\slideheight
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{wideslide}{
  textpos={.05\slidewidth,.85\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{slide}{
  ifsetup=landscape,
    tocpos={.015\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    tocwidth=.14\slidewidth,
    tocsecm={\psline[linewidth=.5pt,linecolor=pdcolor2]%
      (-.05,-.05)(.143\slidewidth,-.05)}
}{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=pdcolor4,linestyle=none,%
      linewidth=0pt](0,.85\slideheight)(.17\slidewidth,.15\slideheight)%
  }{}%
}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{sectionslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\color{pdcolor2}\Large\bfseries\centering,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.575\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.75\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.9\slidewidth
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[wideslide]{sectionwideslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\color{pdcolor2}\Large\bfseries\centering,
  titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.9\slidewidth
}{}
\def\pd@slidetitle#1{%
  \psline[linecolor=pdcolor2](0,-.15cm)(.85\slidewidth,-.15cm)%
  \settowidth\@tempdima{#1}%
  \ifdim\@tempdima>\pd@@titlewidth\@tempdima\pd@@titlewidth\fi
  \psline[linecolor=pdcolor2,linewidth=2.5pt]%
    (0,-.15cm)(\@tempdima,-.15cm)%
  \parbox[b]\pd@@titlewidth{#1}%
}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
\pdifsetup{landscape}{\def\pd@tocslide#1{{\tiny\ding{226}}#1}}{}
\def\labelitemi{\footnotesize\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemii{\small\ding{117}}
\def\labelitemiii{\tiny\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemiv{\tiny\ding{117}}
\pdsetup{
  list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
}
\def\rmdefault{cmss}
%</pdciment>
%
%<*pdelcolors>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-elcolors}[2005/12/10 v1.3 elcolors style (HA)]
\RequirePackage{pifont}
\pddefinepalettes{default}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.17,.31,.44}
  \colorlet{pdcolor2}{yellow!10}
  \colorlet{pdcolor3}{red!10}
  \colorlet{pdcolor4}{blue!10}
  \colorlet{pdcolor5}{rgb,2:pdcolor2,1;pdcolor3,1}
  \colorlet{pdcolor6}{rgb,2:pdcolor2,1;pdcolor4,1}
}
\pddefinetemplate{basic}{
  titlepos={.95\slidewidth,.93\slideheight},titlehook=Br,
  titlewidth=.75\slidewidth,textheight=.68\slideheight,
  titlefont=\large\bfseries\raggedleft,
  clockcolor=pdcolor1,clockhook=tl,clockalign=0,
  clockpos={0,\slideheight},
  lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  tocslidesep=.6ex,
  toctcolor=pdcolor1,
  tochlcolor=pdcolor1,
  tochltcolor=pdcolor4,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    textpos={.05\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    textwidth=.9\slidewidth,
    tocsecsep=.6ex,
    stochook=tr,stocpos={.42\slidewidth,.13\slideheight},
    stocfont=\tiny\raggedleft,
    ntocpos={.46\slidewidth,.13\slideheight},
  ifsetup=landscape,
    textpos={.2\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    textwidth=.68\slidewidth
}{{%
  \psset{linewidth=0pt}%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor3]%
    (0,0)(.44\slidewidth,.14\slideheight)%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor3]%
    (\slidewidth,\slideheight)(.56\slidewidth,.86\slideheight)%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor2]%
    (.09\slidewidth,.09\slideheight)(.91\slidewidth,.91\slideheight)%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor5]%
    (.09\slidewidth,.09\slideheight)(.44\slidewidth,.14\slideheight)%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor5]%
    (.91\slidewidth,.91\slideheight)(.56\slidewidth,.86\slideheight)%
}}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{titleslide}{
  titlefont=\large\bfseries\centering,
  lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  texthook=t,textpos={.5\slidewidth,.7\slideheight},
  textwidth=.76\slidewidth,textfont=\centering,
  textheight=.55\slideheight
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{wideslide}{
  textpos={.12\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
  textwidth=.76\slidewidth
}{}
\pdifsetup{portrait}{%
  \pddefinetemplate[wideslide]{slide}{}{}%
}{%
  \pddefinetemplate[basic]{slide}{
    tocpos={.015\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    tocwidth=.14\slidewidth,
    tocsecm={\psline[linewidth=.5pt,linecolor=pdcolor1]%
      (-.05,-.05)(.143\slidewidth,-.05)}
  }{%
    \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor4,linewidth=0pt]%
      (0,\slideheight)(.17\slidewidth,.2\slideheight)%
    \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor6,linewidth=0pt]%
      (.09\slidewidth,.91\slideheight)(.17\slidewidth,.2\slideheight)%
  }
}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{sectionslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.54\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.68\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.76\slidewidth
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[wideslide]{sectionwideslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering,
  titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.76\slidewidth
}{}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
\def\labelitemi{\footnotesize\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemii{\small\ding{117}}
\def\labelitemiii{\tiny\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemiv{\tiny\ding{117}}
\pdsetup{
  list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
}
\def\rmdefault{cmss}
%</pdelcolors>
%
%<*pdaggie>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-aggie}[2005/12/10 v1.3 aggie style (JS,HA)]
\RequirePackage{times}
\RequirePackage{pifont}
\RequirePackage{pst-grad}
\pddefinepalettes{default}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.17,.31,.44}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.51,.13,.16}
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.96,.94,.89}
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.89,.85,.69}
}
\pddefinetemplate{titleslide}{
  titlefont=\Large\bfseries\color{pdcolor2}\centering,
  clockcolor=pdcolor1,clockpos={.99\slidewidth,\slideheight},
  lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  lffont=\tiny,cffont=\tiny,rffont=\tiny,
  texthook=t,textpos={.5\slidewidth,.65\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth,textfont=\centering,
  textheight=.5\slideheight,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    textheight=.55\slideheight,
    lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
    cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
    rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.03\slideheight}
}{%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor3,linewidth=0pt]%
    (0,.85\slideheight)(\slidewidth,0)%
  \psline[linecolor=pdcolor2]%
    (0,.85\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.85\slideheight)%
  \psellipse[linestyle=solid,linecolor=pdcolor2,fillstyle=solid,%
    fillcolor=pdcolor4](.5\slidewidth,0)(.7\slidewidth,.1\slidewidth)%
}
\pddefinetemplate{basic}{
  titlepos={.2\slidewidth,.93\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.75\slidewidth,textheight=.66\slideheight,
  titlefont=\Large\sl\bfseries\color{pdcolor2}\raggedright,
  lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  clockcolor=pdcolor1,clockpos={.99\slidewidth,\slideheight},
  lffont=\tiny,cffont=\tiny,rffont=\tiny,
  tocslidesep=.8ex,
  textheight=.74\slideheight,
  toctcolor=pdcolor1,
  tochlcolor=pdcolor2,
  tochltcolor=white,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
    cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
    rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
    textpos={.05\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    textwidth=.9\slidewidth,
    tocsecsep=.8ex,
    stochook=tr,stocpos={.48\slidewidth,.09\slideheight},
    stocfont=\tiny\raggedleft,
    ntocpos={.52\slidewidth,.09\slideheight},
  ifsetup=landscape,
    textpos={.2\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    textwidth=.75\slidewidth
}{%
}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{wideslide}{
  textpos={.05\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=portrait,textheight=.7\slideheight
}{%
  \psframe[linestyle=none,fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor3,%
    gradend=white,gradmidpoint=1,gradangle=90,linewidth=0pt]%
    (0,\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.9\slideheight)%
  \pd@aggiebg
}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{slide}{
  ifsetup=landscape,
    tocpos={.015\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    tocwidth=.14\slidewidth,
    tocsecm={\psline[linewidth=.5pt,linecolor=pdcolor2]%
      (-.05,-.05)(.143\slidewidth,-.05)},
  ifsetup=portrait,textheight=.7\slideheight
}{%
  \psframe[fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor3,gradend=white,%
    gradmidpoint=0,linestyle=none,linewidth=0pt]%
    (0,.9\slideheight)(.25\slidewidth,.075\slideheight)%
  \psellipse*[linecolor=white](.25\slidewidth,.6\slideheight)%
    (.075\slidewidth,.7\slideheight)%
  \pd@aggiebg
}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{sectionslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\Large\bfseries\color{pdcolor2}\centering,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.575\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.75\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.9\slidewidth
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[wideslide]{sectionwideslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\Large\bfseries\color{pdcolor2}\centering,
  titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.9\slidewidth
}{}
\def\pd@aggiebg{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor4](0,0)(\slidewidth,.075\slideheight)%
    \psline[linecolor=pdcolor2,linewidth=.5pt]%
      (0,.075\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.075\slideheight)%
  }{%
    \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor4](0,0)(\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
    \psline[linecolor=pdcolor2,linewidth=.5pt]%
      (0,.1\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
  }%
}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
\def\pd@tocslide#1{\ding{118}\,#1}
\def\labelitemi{\color{pdcolor2}\footnotesize\ding{108}}
\def\labelitemii{\color{pdcolor2}\small\ding{70}}
\def\labelitemiii{\color{pdcolor2}\tiny\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemiv{\color{pdcolor2}\tiny\ding{117}}
\pdsetup{
  list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
}
\renewcommand\familydefault{\sfdefault}
%</pdaggie>
%
%<*pdhusky>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-husky}[2005/12/10 v1.3 husky style (JS,HA)]
\RequirePackage{times}
\RequirePackage{pifont}
\RequirePackage{pst-grad}
\pddefinepalettes{default}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.03,0,.29}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.75,0,0}
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.92,.92,.92}
}
\pddefinetemplate{titleslide}{
  titlefont=\Large\rmfamily\bfseries\color{pdcolor2}\centering,
  clockcolor=pdcolor1,clockpos={.99\slidewidth,\slideheight},
  lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  lffont=\tiny\color{white},
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  cffont=\tiny\color{white},
  rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  rffont=\tiny\color{white},
  texthook=t,textpos={.5\slidewidth,.75\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth,textfont=\centering,
  textheight=.66\slideheight,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    textheight=.63\slideheight,
    lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
    cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
    rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
}{{%
  \psset{linestyle=none,linecolor=pdcolor3}%
  \pspolygon*(\slidewidth,.385\slideheight)%
    (.6\slidewidth,\slideheight)(.85\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
    (\slidewidth,.57\slideheight)%
  \pspolygon*(\slidewidth,.25\slideheight)%
    (.15\slidewidth,\slideheight)(.5\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
    (\slidewidth,.35\slideheight)%
  \pspolygon*(\slidewidth,.15\slideheight)%
    (0,.65\slideheight)(0,\slideheight)(.01\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
    (\slidewidth,.225\slideheight)%
  \pspolygon*(\slidewidth,.07\slideheight)%
    (0,.25\slideheight)(0,.535\slideheight)%
    (\slidewidth,.13\slideheight)%
  \psframe[fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2,%
    gradend=white,gradmidpoint=1,gradangle=90](0,.9\slideheight)%
    (\slidewidth,.9\slideheight)%
  \psframe[fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2,%
    gradend=white,gradmidpoint=1,gradangle=90](0,.893\slideheight)%
    (\slidewidth,.893\slideheight)%
  \pd@huskybg
}}
\pddefinetemplate{basic}{
  titlepos={.2\slidewidth,.93\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.75\slidewidth,textheight=.66\slideheight,
  titlefont=\Large\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries\color{pdcolor2}\raggedright,
  clockcolor=pdcolor1,clockpos={.99\slidewidth,\slideheight},
  lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  lffont=\tiny\color{white},
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  cffont=\tiny\color{white},
  rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  rffont=\tiny\color{white},
  tocslidesep=.8ex,
  toctcolor=black,
  tochlcolor=pdcolor2,
  tochltcolor=white,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    toctcolor=white,
    tochlcolor=black,
    titlepos={.05\slidewidth,.93\slideheight},
    lfpos={.03\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
    cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
    rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
    textpos={.05\slidewidth,.85\slideheight},
    textheight=.73\slideheight,
    textwidth=.9\slidewidth,
    tocsecsep=.8ex,
    stochook=tr,stocpos={.48\slidewidth,.09\slideheight},
    stocfont=\tiny\raggedleft,
    ntochook=tl,ntocpos={.52\slidewidth,.09\slideheight},
    ntocfont=\tiny\raggedright,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    textpos={.2\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    textwidth=.75\slidewidth,
    textheight=.74\slideheight,
}{{%
  \psset{linestyle=none,linecolor=pdcolor3}%
  \pspolygon*(\slidewidth,.385\slideheight)%
    (.6\slidewidth,\slideheight)(.85\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
    (\slidewidth,.57\slideheight)%
  \pspolygon*(\slidewidth,.25\slideheight)%
    (.15\slidewidth,\slideheight)(.5\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
    (\slidewidth,.35\slideheight)%
  \pspolygon*(\slidewidth,.15\slideheight)%
    (0,.65\slideheight)(0,\slideheight)(.01\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
    (\slidewidth,.225\slideheight)%
  \pspolygon*(\slidewidth,.07\slideheight)%
    (0,.25\slideheight)(0,.535\slideheight)%
    (\slidewidth,.13\slideheight)%
  \psframe[linestyle=none,fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2,%
    gradend=white,gradmidpoint=1,gradangle=90](0,.9\slideheight)%
    (\slidewidth,.9\slideheight)%
  \psframe[linestyle=none,fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2,%
    gradend=white,gradmidpoint=1,gradangle=90](0,.893\slideheight)%
    (\slidewidth,.893\slideheight)%
  \pd@huskybg
}}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{wideslide}{
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    textpos={.05\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    titlepos={.05\slidewidth,.93\slideheight}
}{%
}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{slide}{
  ifsetup=landscape,
    tocpos={.015\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    tocwidth=.14\slidewidth,
    tocsecm={\psline[linewidth=.5pt,linecolor=pdcolor2]%
      (-.05,-.05)(.143\slidewidth,-.05)},
}{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe[linestyle=none,fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=white,%
      gradend=black,gradmidpoint=.5](.175\slidewidth,.12\slideheight)%
      (.18\slidewidth,.95\slideheight)%
   }{%
    \psframe[linestyle=none,fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=white,%
      gradend=black,gradmidpoint=.25](.025\slidewidth,.12\slideheight)%
      (.025\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
   }%
}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{sectionslide}{
  titlehook=c,
  titlefont=\LARGE\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries\color{pdcolor2}\centering,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.575\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.75\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.9\slidewidth
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[wideslide]{sectionwideslide}{
  titlehook=c,
  titlefont=\LARGE\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries\color{pdcolor2}\centering,
  titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.9\slidewidth
}{}
\def\pd@huskybg{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor2,linewidth=0pt]%
      (0,0)(\slidewidth,.075\slideheight)%
    \psline[linecolor=black,linewidth=1pt]%
      (0,.075\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.075\slideheight)%
  }{%
    \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor2,linewidth=0pt]%
      (0,0)(\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
    \psline[linecolor=black,linewidth=1pt]%
      (0,.1\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
  }%
}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
\def\pd@tocslide#1{\ding{118}\,#1}
\def\labelitemi{\color{pdcolor2}\footnotesize\ding{108}}
\def\labelitemii{\color{pdcolor2}\small\ding{70}}
\def\labelitemiii{\color{pdcolor2}\tiny\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemiv{\color{pdcolor2}\tiny\ding{117}}
\pdsetup{
  list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
}
\renewcommand\familydefault{\sfdefault}
%</pdhusky>
%
%<*pdsailor>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-sailor}[2005/12/10 v1.3 sailor style (MH,HA)]
\RequirePackage{calc}
\RequirePackage{amssymb}
\RequirePackage{pst-grad}
\pddefinepalettes{Sea}{% Sea sailor (default)
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.141,.188,.235}    % Dark blue      #24303C
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.298,.392,.490}    % Medium blue    #4C647D
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.522,.592,.647}    % Light blue     #8597A5
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.8627,.8941,.9255} % Lighter blue   #DCE4EC
}{River}{% River variant
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.141,.235,.192}    % Dark green     #243C31
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.298,.490,.404}    % Medium green   #4C7D67
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.522,.647,.592}    % Light green    #85A597
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.8627,.9255,.8980} % Lighter green  #DCECE5
}{Wine}{% Wine variant
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.235,.141,.161}    % Dark red       #3C2429
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.490,.298,.337}    % Medium red     #7D4C56
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.647,.522,.545}    % Light red      #A5858B
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.9255,.8627,.8745} % Lighter red    #ECDCDF
}{Chocolate}{% Chocolate variant
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.235,.212,.141}    % Dark brown     #3C3624
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.490,.443,.298}    % Medium brown   #7D714C
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.647,.616,.522}    % Light brown    #A59D85
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.9255,.9098,.8627} % Lighter brown  #ECE8DC
}{Cocktail}{% Cocktail variant
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.180,.141,.235}    % Dark violet    #2E243C
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.380,.298,.490}    % Medium violet  #614C7D
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.576,.522,.647}    % Light violet   #9385A5
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.8902,.8627,.9255} % Lighter violet #E3DCEC
}
\pddefinetemplate{basic}{%
  texthook=tl,
  titlefont=\Large\bfseries\color{white}\raggedleft,
  clockhook=tl,clockpos={0,\slideheight},clockalign=0,
  iacolor=pdcolor3,
  toctcolor=pdcolor3,
  tochlcolor=white,
  tochltcolor=pdcolor1,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    lfpos={.02\slidewidth,.02\slideheight},
    cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.02\slideheight},
    rfpos={.98\slidewidth,.02\slideheight},
    tocsecsep=2.5ex,
    tocslidesep=1.2ex,
    tocslideindent=1ex,
    tocpos={.01\slidewidth,.8\slideheight},
    tocwidth=.14\slidewidth,
    tocsecm={\psline[linewidth=.5pt,linecolor=pdcolor1]%
      (-.05,-.05)(.14\slidewidth,-.05)},
  ifsetup=portrait,
    lfpos={.02\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
    cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
    rfpos={.98\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
    tocsecsep=.1ex,
    tocslidesep=.1ex,
    stochook=tr,
    stocpos={.49\slidewidth,.09\slideheight},
    stocfont=\tiny\raggedleft,
    stocwidth=.48\slidewidth,
    ntocpos={.51\slidewidth,.09\slideheight},
    ntocwidth=.48\slidewidth,
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{topframe}{%
  titlehook=r,
  clockcolor=white,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlewidth=.9\slidewidth,
    titlepos={.95\slidewidth,.92\slideheight},
    textheight=.74\slideheight,
    textpos={.2\slidewidth,.8\slideheight},
    textwidth=.77\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlewidth=.94\slidewidth,
    titlepos={.98\slidewidth,.95\slideheight},
    textheight=.75\slideheight,
    textpos={.03\slidewidth,.87\slideheight},
    textwidth=.94\slidewidth
}{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \pd@sailorroundedtopframe{.15\slideheight}%
  }{%
    \pd@sailorroundedtopframe{.1\slideheight}%
  }%
}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{titleslide}{%
  texthook=rt,
  textpos={.95\slidewidth,.77\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth,
  textfont=\color{pdcolor1}\raggedleft\tabcolsep0pt,
  textheight=.72\slideheight,
  titlefont=\Large\bfseries\color{white},
  clockcolor=pdcolor1,
  tocpos,ntocpos,stocpos
}{{%
  \psset{linecolor=pdcolor1}%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \pd@sailorroundedframe{\slidewidth}{.25\slidewidth}{.7\slideheight}%
      {.17\slideheight}%
  }{%
    \pd@sailorroundedframe{\slidewidth}{.25\slidewidth}{.7\slideheight}%
      {.12\slideheight}%
  }%
  \pd@sailorgrad\slidewidth{.5\slideheight}%
  \psset{linecolor=pdcolor3}%
  \psarc*(0,.2\slideheight){3pt}{270}{90}%
  \multips(.08\slidewidth,.2\slideheight)(.08\slidewidth,0){9}{%
    \qdisk(0,0){3pt}%
  }%
}}
\pddefinetemplate[topframe]{slide}{}{{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \pd@sailorgrad{.16\slidewidth}{.5\slideheight}%
    \psset{linecolor=pdcolor3}%
    \multips(.16\slidewidth,0.75pt)(0,.01\slideheight){82}{%
      \qdisk(0,0){.75pt}%
    }%
  }\pd@sailortocbg
}}
\pddefinetemplate[topframe]{wideslide}{%
  tocpos,ifsetup=landscape,
    textpos={.03\slidewidth,.8\slideheight},
    textwidth=.94\slidewidth
}{%
  \pdifsetup{portrait}\pd@sailortocbg{}%
}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{sectionslide}{%
  titlefont=\Large\bfseries\color{pdcolor1}\centering,
  titlehook=c,
  titlewidth=.55\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.58\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{sectionwideslide}{%
  tocpos,stocpos,ntocpos,
  titlehook=c,titlewidth=.75\slidewidth,
  titlepos={.4\slidewidth,.695\slideheight},
  titlefont=\Large\bfseries\color{white}\centering
}{{%
  \pd@sailorgrad\slidewidth{.5\slideheight}%
  \psset{linecolor=pdcolor1}%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \pd@sailorroundedframe{0pt}{.75\slidewidth}{.7\slideheight}%
      {.1\slideheight}%
  }{%
    \pd@sailorroundedframe{0pt}{.75\slidewidth}{.7\slideheight}%
      {.07\slideheight}%
  }%
  \psset{linecolor=pdcolor3}%
  \psarc*(\slidewidth,.2\slideheight){3pt}{90}{270}%
  \multips(.92\slidewidth,.2\slideheight)(-.08\slidewidth,0){9}{%
    \qdisk(0,0){3pt}%
  }%
}}
\def\pd@sailorroundedtopframe#1{{%
  \setlength\@tempdima{\slideheight-#1}%
  \psset{linewidth=0pt,fillcolor=pdcolor2,fillstyle=solid,linecolor=pdcolor2}%
  \psframe(#1,\slideheight)(\slidewidth,\@tempdima)%
  \pswedge*(#1,\slideheight){#1}{180}{275}%
  \psset{linecolor=pdcolor1,linewidth=.8pt}%
  \psline(\slidewidth,\@tempdima)(#1,\@tempdima)%
  \psarc[fillstyle=none](#1,\slideheight){#1}{180}{270}%
}}
\def\pd@sailorroundedframe#1#2#3#4{{%
  \setlength\@tempdima{#3+#4}%
  \setlength\@tempdimb{#3-#4}%
  \psset{linewidth=0pt,linecolor=pdcolor2,fillcolor=pdcolor2,fillstyle=solid}%
  \psframe(#1,\@tempdima)(#2,\@tempdimb)%
  \ifdim#1>#2\pswedge*(#2,#3){#4}{85}{275}\else\pswedge*(#2,#3){#4}{265}{95}\fi
  \psset{linecolor=pdcolor1,linewidth=.8pt}%
  \psline(#1,\@tempdima)(#2,\@tempdima)%
  \ifdim#1>#2\psarc(#2,#3){#4}{90}{270}\else\psarc(#2,#3){#4}{270}{90}\fi
  \psline(#1,\@tempdimb)(#2,\@tempdimb)%
}}
\def\pd@sailorgrad#1#2{%
  \psframe[linestyle=none,linewidth=0pt,fillstyle=gradient,%
    gradbegin=pdcolor4,gradend=white,gradmidpoint=0](0,0)(#1,#2)%
}
\def\pd@sailortocbg{{%
  \psset{linecolor=pdcolor3}%
  \pd@sailorgrad\slidewidth{.1\slideheight}%
  \multips(1.5pt,.1\slideheight)(.01\slidewidth,0){100}{%
    \qdisk(0,0){.75pt}%
  }%
}}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
\def\pd@title#1{%
  \parbox[c][.15\textheight]{.75\slidewidth}{\raggedleft#1}%
  \vskip-3em\vskip.2\slideheight
}
\def\pd@tochighlight#1{%
  \hskip\@tempdima
  \begin{minipage}[b]\@tempdimb
    \pd@usedtocfont\color\pd@@tochltcolor#1%
  \end{minipage}%
}
\def\labelitemi{\footnotesize\color{pdcolor2}\ensuremath\blacksquare}
\def\labelitemii{\footnotesize\color{pdcolor1}\ensuremath\square}
\def\labelitemiii{\tiny\color{pdcolor2}\ensuremath\blacksquare}
\def\labelitemiv{\tiny\color{pdcolor1}\ensuremath\square}
\pdsetup{list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}}
\def\rmdefault{phv}
\def\sfdefault{phv}
\def\Hv@scale{.85}
%</pdsailor>
%
%<*pdupen>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-upen}[2005/12/10 v1.3 upen style (PRU,HA)]
\RequirePackage{calc}
\RequirePackage{pifont}
\RequirePackage{pst-grad}
\pddefinepalettes{default}{
  \colorlet{pdcolor1}{white}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{0,.01,.37}
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.01,.06,.65}
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.98,.78,.18}
}
\pddefinetemplate{basic}{
  titlefont=\large\bfseries\color{pdcolor4},
  clockcolor=pdcolor4,clockpos={.99\slidewidth,\slideheight},
  tocslidesep=.6ex,
  toctcolor=white,
  tochlcolor=pdcolor2,
  tochltcolor=pdcolor4,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    textheight=.64\slideheight,
    titlepos={.12\slidewidth,.87\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.83\slidewidth,
    textpos={.12\slidewidth,.78\slideheight},
    textwidth=.83\slidewidth,
    tocsecsep=.6ex,
    stochook=tr,stocpos={.47\slidewidth,.12\slideheight},
    stocfont=\tiny\raggedleft,
    ntochook=tl,ntocpos={.52\slidewidth,.12\slideheight},
    lfpos={.05\slidewidth,.045\slideheight},
    cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.045\slideheight},
    rfpos={.95\slidewidth,.045\slideheight},
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.175\slidewidth,.87\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.775\slidewidth,
    textheight=.7\slideheight,
    textpos={.175\slidewidth,.77\slideheight},
    textwidth=.775\slidewidth,
    lfpos={.05\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
    cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
    rfpos={.95\slidewidth,.03\slideheight},
    tocpos={.02\slidewidth,.77\slideheight},
    tocwidth=.13\slidewidth,
    tocsecm={\psline[linewidth=.5pt,linecolor=pdcolor4]%
      (-.05,-.05)(.12\slidewidth,-.05)}
}{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe[linestyle=none,fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2,%
      gradend=pdcolor3,gradangle=-90,gradmidpoint=0,linewidth=0pt]%
      (0,.8\slideheight)(\slidewidth,0)%
    \psframe[linestyle=none,fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2,%
      gradend=pdcolor2,gradmidpoint=0,dimen=outer,linewidth=0pt]%
      (0,.8\slideheight)(\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  }{%
    \psframe[linestyle=none,fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor3,%
      gradend=pdcolor2,gradmidpoint=0,dimen=outer]%
      (-.01\slidewidth,1.1\slideheight)(1.05\slidewidth,-.01\slideheight)%
  }%
}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{titleslide}{
  texthook=t,textpos={.5\slidewidth,.7\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth,textfont=\centering\color{pdcolor4},
  textheight=.63\slideheight,
  titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering,tocpos,ntocpos,stocpos
}{%
  \setlength\@tempdima{.8\slideheight+.5pt}%
  \psframe[fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor3,gradend=pdcolor4,%
    gradangle=90,gradmidpoint=.5,linestyle=none,dimen=outer,linewidth=0pt]%
    (0,.8\slideheight)(\slidewidth,\@tempdima)%
  \setlength\@tempdima{.2\slideheight+.5pt}%
  \psframe[fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor3,gradend=pdcolor4,%
    gradangle=90,gradmidpoint=.5,linestyle=none,dimen=outer,linewidth=0pt]%
    (0,.2\slideheight)(\slidewidth,\@tempdima)%
}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{slide}{}{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe[fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2,gradend=pdcolor3,%
      gradmidpoint=1,linestyle=none,dimen=outer,linewidth=0pt]%
      (0,\slideheight)(.15\slidewidth,0)%
    \pd@upenbg{.15\slidewidth}{.05\slidewidth}%
  }{\pd@upenbg{.1\slidewidth}{0pt}}%
}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{wideslide}{
  titlepos={.05\slidewidth,.87\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.9\slidewidth,
  textpos={.05\slidewidth,.77\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=landscape,tocpos
}{%
  \setlength\@tempdima{.8\slideheight-.5pt}%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe[fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2,gradend=white,linewidth=0pt,%
      gradangle=90,gradmidpoint=.2,linestyle=none,dimen=outer]%
      (.05\slidewidth,.8\slideheight)(.5\slidewidth,\@tempdima)%
  }{%
    \psframe[fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2,gradend=white,linewidth=0pt,%
      gradangle=90,gradmidpoint=.2,linestyle=none,dimen=outer]%
      (0,.8\slideheight)(.45\slidewidth,\@tempdima)%
  }%
}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{sectionslide}{
  titlewidth=.45\slidewidth,titlehook=c,
  titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering\color{pdcolor4},
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.59\slidewidth,.53\slideheight},
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.53\slideheight}
}{{%
  \psset{linewidth=.8pt,linecolor=pdcolor3}%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=pdcolor2,linestyle=none]%
      (.34\slidewidth,.65\slideheight)(.84\slidewidth,.4\slideheight)%
  }{%
    \psframe[fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=pdcolor2,linestyle=none]%
      (.16\slidewidth,.65\slideheight)(.84\slidewidth,.4\slideheight)%
  }%
}}
\pddefinetemplate[wideslide]{sectionwideslide}{%
  titlewidth=.62\slidewidth,titlehook=c,
  titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering\color{pdcolor4},
  titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.53\slideheight}
}{%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor2]%
    (.16\slidewidth,.65\slideheight)(.84\slidewidth,.4\slideheight)%
}
\def\pd@upenbg#1#2{%
  \setlength\@tempdima{#1+.5pt}%
  \psframe[fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2,gradend=white,%
    gradmidpoint=.4,linestyle=none,dimen=outer,linewidth=0pt]%
    (#1,.5\slideheight)(\@tempdima,\slideheight)%
  \setlength\@tempdima{.45\slidewidth+#2}%
  \setlength\@tempdimb{.8\slideheight-.5pt}%
  \psframe[fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2,gradend=white,linewidth=0pt,%
    gradangle=90,gradmidpoint=.2,linestyle=none,dimen=outer]%
    (#2,.8\slideheight)(\@tempdima,\@tempdimb)%
}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
\def\pd@tochighlight#1{%
  \begin{minipage}[b]\pd@@tocwidth
    \pd@usedtocfont\color\pd@@tochltcolor#1%
  \end{minipage}%
}
\pdifsetup{landscape}{\def\pd@tocentry#1{{\tiny\ensuremath\bullet}\ #1}}{}
\def\labelitemi{\footnotesize\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemii{\color{pdcolor4}\small ---}
\def\labelitemiii{\color{red}\scriptsize\ding{115}}
\def\labelitemiv{\color{yellow}\tiny\ensuremath\circ}
\pdsetup{
  list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
}
\def\rmdefault{phv}
\def\sfdefault{phv}
\def\Hv@scale{.85}
%</pdupen>
%
%<*pdbframe>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-bframe}[2005/12/10 v1.2 bframe style (PRU,HA)]
\RequirePackage{pifont}
\RequirePackage{pst-blur}
\pddefinepalettes{default}{
  \colorlet{pdcolor1}{white}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.7,.1,.1}
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.01,.05,.56}
}
\pddefinetemplate{basic}{
  titlehook=B,titlefont=\large\bfseries\centering,
  clockcolor=pdcolor3,clockpos={.99\slidewidth,\slideheight},
  lfpos={.05\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  rfpos={.95\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  tocslidesep=.6ex,
  toctcolor=white,
  tochlcolor=pdcolor2,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.91\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.9\slidewidth,
    textpos={.05\slidewidth,.85\slideheight},
    textwidth=.9\slidewidth,textheight=.69\slideheight,
    tocsecsep=.6ex,
    stochook=tr,stocpos={.48\slidewidth,.13\slideheight},
    stocfont=\tiny\raggedleft,
    ntocpos={.52\slidewidth,.13\slideheight},
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.58\slidewidth,.91\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.75\slidewidth,
    textpos={.2\slidewidth,.85\slideheight},
    textwidth=.75\slidewidth,textheight=.69\slideheight
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{titleslide}{
  texthook=t,textpos={.5\slidewidth,.75\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth,textfont=\centering,
  titlepos,textheight=.59\slideheight
}\pd@bframebg
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{wideslide}{
  titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.91\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.9\slidewidth,
  textpos={.05\slidewidth,.85\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth
}\pd@bframebg
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{slide}{
  ifsetup=landscape,
    tocpos={.015\slidewidth,.83\slideheight},
    tocwidth=.14\slidewidth,
    tocsecm={\psline[linewidth=.5pt,linecolor=pdcolor2]%
      (-.05,-.05)(.143\slidewidth,-.05)}
}{{%
  \psset{linecolor=pdcolor3,shadow=true,blur=true,shadowcolor=gray!60}%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe*[framearc=.3](0,.87\slideheight)(.17\slidewidth,.15\slideheight)%
    \psframe*[framearc=.1](.18\slidewidth,.87\slideheight)(.98\slidewidth,.15\slideheight)%
    \psframe*[framearc=.3](.02\slidewidth,.01\slideheight)(.98\slidewidth,.08\slideheight)%
  }{%
    \psframe*[framearc=.3](.02\slidewidth,.01\slideheight)(.98\slidewidth,.14\slideheight)%
    \psframe*[framearc=.1](.02\slidewidth,.87\slideheight)(.98\slidewidth,.15\slideheight)%
  }%
}}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{sectionslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.575\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[wideslide]{sectionwideslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\color{white}\Large\bfseries\centering,
  titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.9\slidewidth
}{}
\def\pd@bframebg{{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \def\pd@tempa{.08\slideheight}%
  }{%
    \def\pd@tempa{.14\slideheight}%
  }%
  \psset{linecolor=pdcolor3,shadow=true,blur=true,shadowcolor=gray!60}%
  \psframe*[framearc=.3](.02\slidewidth,.01\slideheight)(.98\slidewidth,\pd@tempa)%
  \psframe*[framearc=.1](.02\slidewidth,.87\slideheight)(.98\slidewidth,.15\slideheight)%
}}
\def\pd@slidetitle#1{%
  \settowidth\@tempdima{#1}%
  \ifdim\@tempdima>\pd@@titlewidth\@tempdima\pd@@titlewidth\fi
  \rput[B](0,0){\psframebox*[framearc=.3,fillcolor=pdcolor3,%
    shadow=true,blur=true,shadowcolor=gray!60]{%
      \parbox[b]\@tempdima{#1}%
    }%
  }%
}
\def\pd@title#1{%
  {\let\thanks\@gobble\let\footnote\@gobble\settowidth\@tempdima{#1}}%
  \ifdim\@tempdima>\pd@@titlewidth\@tempdima\pd@@titlewidth\fi
  \advance\@tempdima-6pt
  \psframebox*[framearc=.3,fillcolor=pdcolor2]{\parbox[b]\@tempdima{#1}}%
}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
\pdifsetup{landscape}{\def\pd@tocslide#1{{\tiny\color{yellow}\ding{117}} #1}}{}
\def\labelitemi{\footnotesize\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemii{\small\ding{117}}
\def\labelitemiii{\tiny\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemiv{\tiny\ding{117}}
\pdsetup{
  list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
}
\def\rmdefault{put}
%</pdbframe>
%
%<*pdhoratio>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-horatio}[2005/12/10 v1.1 horatio style (ML,HA)]
\RequirePackage{pifont}
\pddefinepalettes{default}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{HTML}{004477}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{HTML}{5588ae}
}
\pddefinetemplate{basic}{
  titlehook=Bl,
  titlepos={.2\slidewidth,.91\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.77\slidewidth,
  titlefont=\color{white}\large\bfseries\raggedright,
  clockcolor=white,clockpos={.99\slidewidth,\slideheight},
  lfpos={.2\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  lffont=\tiny\color{white},
  cfpos={.585\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  cffont=\tiny\color{white},
  rfpos={.97\slidewidth,.04\slideheight},
  rffont=\tiny\color{white},
  tocslidesep=.6ex,
  textheight=.68\slideheight,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    toctcolor=pdcolor1,
    tochlcolor=pdcolor1,
    tochltcolor=white,
    tocpos={.01\slidewidth,.81\slideheight},
    tocwidth=.14\slidewidth,
    tocsecm={\psline[linewidth=.5pt,linecolor=pdcolor1]%
      (-.05,-.05)(.143\slidewidth,-.05)},
  ifsetup=portrait,
    toctcolor=white,
    tochlcolor=white,
    tochltcolor=pdcolor1,
    tocsecsep=.6ex,
    stochook=tr,stocpos={.55\slidewidth,.09\slideheight},
    stocfont=\tiny\raggedleft,
    ntocpos={.57\slidewidth,.09\slideheight}
}{{%
  \psset{linecolor=pdcolor1}%
  \psframe*(0,0)(\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
  \psframe*(0,.85\slideheight)(\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  \psset{linecolor=pdcolor2,linewidth=1pt}%
  \psline(.17\slidewidth,0)(.17\slidewidth,.1\slideheight)%
  \psline(.17\slidewidth,.85\slideheight)(.17\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
}}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{titleslide}{
  titlefont=\large\bfseries\centering,
  texthook=t,
  textpos={.5\slidewidth,.7\slideheight},
  textwidth=.75\slidewidth,
  textfont=\centering,
  textheight=.57\slideheight,
  ifsetup=landscape,tocpos,ifsetup=portrait,stocpos,ntocpos
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{slide}{
  textpos={.2\slidewidth,.81\slideheight},
  textwidth=.77\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    textpos={.05\slidewidth,.81\slideheight},
    textwidth=.9\slidewidth
}{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psline[linewidth=1pt,linecolor=pdcolor2]%
      (.17\slidewidth,0)(.17\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  }{}%
}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{wideslide}{
  textpos={.03\slidewidth,.81\slideheight},
  textwidth=.94\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=landscape,tocpos,ifsetup=portrait,
    textpos={.05\slidewidth,.81\slideheight},
    textwidth=.9\slidewidth
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{sectionslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.6\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.7\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.75\slidewidth
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[wideslide]{sectionwideslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\Large\bfseries\centering,
  titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.75\slidewidth
}{}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
\def\labelitemi{\small\ding{'64}}
\def\labelitemii{\small\ding{'70}}
\def\labelitemiii{\small\ding{'63}}
\def\labelitemiv{\small\ding{'67}}
\pdsetup{
  list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
}
\def\rmdefault{cmss}
%</pdhoratio>
%
%<*pdpaintings>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-paintings}[2005/12/10 v1.1 paintings (TDK,HA)]
\RequirePackage{times}
\RequirePackage{pifont}
\pddefinepalettes{Syndics}{% Rembrandt van Rijn: "The Syndics" - 1662
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.06,.06,.06} % Black hat
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.97,.97,.94} % Collar of rising man
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.22,.09,.09} % Tablecloth lower right
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.97,.97,.91} % Book page
  \definecolor{pdcolor5}{rgb}{.58,.19,.13} % Tablecloth lower left
  \definecolor{pdcolor6}{rgb}{.42,.2,.22}  % Back wall
  \definecolor{pdcolor7}{rgb}{.84,.71,.55} % Forehead of man in background
}{Skater}{% Gilbert Stuart: "The Skater (Portrait of William Grant)" - 1782
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.09,.06,.09} % Hat
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{1,.97,.94}   % White collar
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.26,.22,.19} % Ice
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.94,.91,.87} % Sky
  \definecolor{pdcolor5}{rgb}{.78,.52,.45} % Right cheek
  \definecolor{pdcolor6}{rgb}{.45,.39,.26} % Ground under small figures
  \definecolor{pdcolor7}{rgb}{.71,.71,.68} % Frozen lake at left
}{GoldenGate}{% Giotto: "Meeting of Joachim and Anne at the Golden Gate" - 1305-10
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.13,.09,.13} % Dress of woman in black
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.94,.94,.91} % Bridge
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.06,.09,.22} % Blue sky
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.94,.91,.87} % Dress of woman with shawl
  \definecolor{pdcolor5}{rgb}{.52,.26,.26} % Joachim's robe
  \definecolor{pdcolor6}{rgb}{.65,.35,.16} % Anne's robe
  \definecolor{pdcolor7}{rgb}{.91,.84,.42} % Joachim's halo
}{Lamentation}{% Giotto: "Lamentation of Christ" - 1305-10
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.16,.09,.06} % Dark hair of man
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.91,.91,.94} % White robe at lower left
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.19,.22,.29} % Cloak of Christ
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.94,.94,.91} % Skin of Christ
  \definecolor{pdcolor5}{rgb}{.55,.26,.22} % Mary Magdalene dress
  \definecolor{pdcolor6}{rgb}{.19,.26,.52} % Sky
  \definecolor{pdcolor7}{rgb}{.84,.74,.71} % Mary Magdalene sleeve
}{HolyWood}{% Piero della Francesca: "Discovery of the Holy Wood" - ca. 1455
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.19,.21,.19} % Horse's ear
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.97,.97,.94} % Attendant's neck
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.29,.13,.13} % Attendant's russet dress
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.94,.94,.91} % Horse's rear
  \definecolor{pdcolor5}{rgb}{.22,.35,.55} % Queen of Sheba's dress
  \definecolor{pdcolor6}{rgb}{.74,.48,.42} % Dusky rose dress
  \definecolor{pdcolor7}{rgb}{.84,.71,.61} % Queen of Sheba's hand
}{Europa}{% Titian: "The Rape of Europa" - 1559-62
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.09,.06,.03} % Bull's eye
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{1,.97,.84}   % Europa's bodice
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.16,.13,.09} % Sea
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{1,.97,.84}   % Europa's breast
  \definecolor{pdcolor5}{rgb}{.58,.26,.13} % Flying cape
  \definecolor{pdcolor6}{rgb}{.32,.29,.39} % Deep blue sky
  \definecolor{pdcolor7}{rgb}{.84,.78,.52} % Bull's right front leg
}{Moitessier}{% Jean Auguste Dominque Ingres: "Madame Moitessier, Standing" - 1851
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.06,.03,.03} % Black dress
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.87,.84,.78} % Accessories at lower left
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.22,.03,.06} % Deep red wall
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{1,.97,.91}   % Accessories at lower left
  \definecolor{pdcolor5}{rgb}{.78,.35,.32} % Flower in hair
  \definecolor{pdcolor6}{rgb}{.58,.55,.71} % Blue jewel on left wrist
  \definecolor{pdcolor7}{rgb}{1,.78,.65}   % Left forearm
}{MayThird}{% Francisco Goya: "Third of May, 1808" - 1814
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{0,0,0}       % Black sky
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.97,.97,.94} % Shirt of victim
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.29,.19,.13} % Face of victim
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.97,.97,.97} % Left side of lantern
  \definecolor{pdcolor5}{rgb}{.55,.26,.22} % Blood of man in foreground
  \definecolor{pdcolor6}{rgb}{.68,.48,.16} % Trousers of victim
  \definecolor{pdcolor7}{rgb}{.68,.65,.58} % Coattails of foreground soldier
}{PearlEarring}{% Johannes Vermeer: "Girl with a Pearl Earring" - 1665
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.06,.06,.06} % Pupil of eye
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.97,.97,.91} % Sclera of left eye
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.26,.29,.42} % Blue head scarf
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{1,1,.9}      % Reflection off earring
  \definecolor{pdcolor5}{rgb}{.71,.61,.39} % Beige head scarf
  \definecolor{pdcolor6}{rgb}{.65,.35,.29} % Lower lip
  \definecolor{pdcolor7}{rgb}{.68,.71,.78} % Light blue over forehead
}{Charon}{% Michelangelo: "Charon" (Detail from "The Last Judgment" - 1534-41
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.91,.91,.87} % Sclera of right eye
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.13,.13,.13} % Pupil of right eye
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.39,.39,.48} % Left ear
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.91,.91,.94} % Right forehead
  \definecolor{pdcolor5}{rgb}{.65,.71,.84} % Sky at upper right
  \definecolor{pdcolor6}{rgb}{.81,.78,.65} % Right eyebrow
  \definecolor{pdcolor7}{rgb}{.42,.35,.39} % Moustache
}
\pddefinetemplate{titleslide}{
  titlefont=\LARGE\sl\color{pdcolor4}\centering,
  clockcolor=pdcolor4,clockpos={.99\slidewidth,\slideheight},
  texthook=t,
  textpos={.5\slidewidth,.65\slideheight},
  textwidth=.8\slidewidth,
  textfont=\large\color{pdcolor4}\centering,
  textheight=.5\slideheight
}{%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor3](0,\slideheight)(\slidewidth,0)%
}
\pddefinetemplate{slide}{
  titlepos={.05\slidewidth,.93\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.9\slidewidth,
  titlefont=\bfseries\color{pdcolor4}\raggedright,
  clockcolor=pdcolor4,clockpos={.99\slidewidth,\slideheight},
  textpos={.05\slidewidth,.85\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth,
  lfpos={.015\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
  rfpos={.985\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
  rftemp=\pd@@rf,
  textheight=.8\slideheight
}{%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor2](0,0)(\slidewidth,.89\slideheight)%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor3](0,\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.89\slideheight)%
}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{wideslide}{}{}
\pddefinetemplate[titleslide]{sectionslide}{
  titlehook=c,titlefont=\LARGE\color{pdcolor4}\centering,
  titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.8\slidewidth
}{}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{
  sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionslide
}
\def\labelitemi{\color{pdcolor3}\ensuremath\bullet}
\def\labelitemii{\color{pdcolor5}\ensuremath\bullet}
\def\labelitemiii{\color{pdcolor6}\ensuremath\bullet}
\def\labelitemiv{\color{pdcolor1}\ensuremath\bullet}
\pdsetup{
  list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt},
  dmaxheight=.85\slideheight
}
\def\familydefault{\sfdefault}
%</pdpaintings>
%
%<*pdklope>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-klope}[2005/12/10 v1.1 klope style (CE,HA)]
\RequirePackage{pifont}
\RequirePackage{pst-slpe}
\pddefinepalettes{Spring}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.475,.376,.271} % cedar
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.682,.749,.376} % moss
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{1,.949,.749}    % sand
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.749,.675,.376} % driftwood
  \colorlet{myiacolor}{pdcolor4}
  \colorlet{sectitlecolor}{pdcolor2}
  \colorlet{stitlecolor}{pdcolor3}
  \colorlet{lgsquare}{pdcolor1}
  \colorlet{smsquare}{pdcolor4}
  \colorlet{slidebg}{pdcolor3}
  \colorlet{slidehbg}{pdcolor2}
  \colorlet{mytoctcolor}{pdcolor1}
  \colorlet{mytochltcolor}{pdcolor3}
  \def\pd@klopebg{%
    \psframe[linestyle=none,fillstyle=slope,slopebegin=pdcolor3,%
      slopeend=pdcolor2,slopeangle=270](0,0)(\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  }
}{PastelFlower}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.349,.5,.5}     % sea green
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.8,.706,.561}   % brown
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.812,.902,.902} % sky blue
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{.8,.561,.561}   % rose
  \colorlet{myiacolor}{pdcolor4}
  \colorlet{sectitlecolor}{pdcolor4}
  \colorlet{stitlecolor}{pdcolor3}
  \colorlet{lgsquare}{pdcolor1}
  \colorlet{smsquare}{pdcolor4}
  \colorlet{slidebg}{pdcolor3}
  \colorlet{slidehbg}{pdcolor2}
  \colorlet{mytoctcolor}{pdcolor1}
  \colorlet{mytochltcolor}{pdcolor3}
  \def\pd@klopebg{%
    \psframe[linestyle=none,fillstyle=slope,slopebegin=pdcolor3,%
      slopeend=pdcolor2,slopeangle=270](0,0)(\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  }
}{BlueWater}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.902,.957,1}    % lightblue
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.376,.588,.749} % medblue
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.749,.635,.376} % lighttan
  \definecolor{pdcolor4}{rgb}{1,.8,.749}      % pink
  \colorlet{myiacolor}{pdcolor3}
  \colorlet{sectitlecolor}{pdcolor1}
  \colorlet{stitlecolor}{pdcolor2}
  \colorlet{lgsquare}{pdcolor3}
  \colorlet{smsquare}{pdcolor4}
  \colorlet{slidebg}{pdcolor2}
  \colorlet{slidehbg}{pdcolor1}
  \colorlet{mytoctcolor}{pdcolor3}
  \colorlet{mytochltcolor}{pdcolor2}
  \def\pd@klopebg{%
    \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor2](0,0)(\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  }
}{BlackWhite}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{0,0,0}    % white
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{1,1,1}    % black
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.5,.5,.5} % gray
  \colorlet{myiacolor}{pdcolor3}
  \colorlet{sectitlecolor}{pdcolor1}
  \colorlet{stitlecolor}{pdcolor1}
  \colorlet{lgsquare}{pdcolor1}
  \colorlet{smsquare}{pdcolor3}
  \colorlet{slidebg}{pdcolor2}
  \colorlet{slidehbg}{pdcolor2}
  \colorlet{mytoctcolor}{pdcolor3}
  \colorlet{mytochltcolor}{pdcolor1}
  \def\pd@klopebg{%
    \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor2](0,0)(\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  }
}
\pddefinetemplate{titleslide}{
  textpos={.15\slidewidth,.75\slideheight},
  textwidth=.7\slidewidth,
  titlefont=\bfseries\LARGE\centering,
  textfont=\centering,
  textheight=.67\slideheight,
  clockhook=t,clockpos={.5\slidewidth,.045\slideheight},
  clockalign=1,clockcolor=pdcolor1
}{{%
  \psset{linewidth=0pt}\pd@klopebg
  \pd@klopesq+-01\pd@klopesq++00\pd@klopesq-+10\pd@klopesq--11%
}}
\pddefinetemplate{slide}{
  titlepos={.15\slidewidth,.93\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.7\slidewidth,
  titlefont=\bfseries\Large\color{stitlecolor}\centering,
  stochook=t,
  stocpos={.5\slidewidth,.89\slideheight},
  stocwidth=.7\slidewidth,stocorient=h,
  toctcolor=mytoctcolor,
  tochltcolor=mytochltcolor,
  tocsecsep=4pt,
  textpos={.05\slidewidth,.8\slideheight},
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth,
  textheight=.72\slideheight,
  lfpos={.015\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
  lffont=\tiny,
  cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
  cffont=\tiny,
  rfpos={.985\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
  rffont=\tiny,
  iacolor=myiacolor,
  clockhook=t,clockpos={.5\slidewidth,.045\slideheight},
  clockalign=1,clockcolor=pdcolor1
}{{%
  \psset{linewidth=0pt}%
  \psframe*[linecolor=slidebg](0,0)(\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  \psframe*[linecolor=slidehbg](0,.85\slideheight)(\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  \pd@klopesq+-01\pd@klopesq--11%
  \psset{linewidth=.1pt}%
  \psline[linecolor=pdcolor1](0,.05\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.05\slideheight)%
  \psline[linecolor=slidehbg](0,.055\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.055\slideheight)%
}}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{wideslide}{}{}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{sectionslide}{
  titlepos={.15\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
  titlefont=\bfseries\LARGE\color{sectitlecolor}\centering,
  textpos,lfpos,cfpos,rfpos
}{{%
  \psframe*[linecolor=slidebg](0,0)(\slidewidth,.5\slideheight)%
  \pd@klopesq++00\pd@klopesq-+10%
}}
\def\pd@klopesq#1#2#3#4{%
  \@tempdima#3\slidewidth\@tempdimb#4\slideheight
  \advance\@tempdima#1.3cm\advance\@tempdimb#2.3cm
  \edef\pd@tempa{\the\@tempdima}\edef\pd@tempb{\the\@tempdimb}%
  \advance\@tempdima#1.8cm\advance\@tempdimb#2.8cm
  \psframe*[linecolor=lgsquare](\pd@tempa,\pd@tempb)%
    (\@tempdima,\@tempdimb)%
  \@tempdima\pd@tempa\@tempdimb\pd@tempb
  \advance\@tempdima#1.3cm\advance\@tempdimb#2.3cm
  \edef\pd@tempa{\the\@tempdima}\edef\pd@tempb{\the\@tempdimb}%
  \advance\@tempdima#1.7cm\advance\@tempdimb#2.7cm
  \psframe*[linecolor=smsquare](\pd@tempa,\pd@tempb)%
    (\@tempdima,\@tempdimb)%
}
\def\pd@tocdisplay#1{\pd@usedtocfont\color\pd@@toctcolor#1}
\def\pd@tochighlight#1{\pd@usedtocfont\color\pd@@tochltcolor#1}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionslide}
\def\labelitemi{\footnotesize\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemii{\small\ding{117}}
\def\labelitemiii{\tiny\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemiv{\tiny\ding{117}}
\pdsetup{
  list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
}
\def\rmdefault{cmss}
%</pdklope>
%
%<*pdjefka>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-jefka}[2005/12/10 v1.1 jefka style (CE,HA)]
\RequirePackage{pifont}
\pddefinepalettes{brown}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{RGB}{121,96,69}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{1,.949,.749}
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{RGB}{190,163,117}
}{seagreen}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{HTML}{FFE680}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.349,.5,.5}
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{HTML}{FFC080}
}{blue}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{.902,.957,1}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{HTML}{00487D}
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.749,.635,.376}
}{white}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{rgb}{0,0,0}
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{1,1,1}
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{rgb}{.5,.5,.5}
}
\pddefinetemplate{titleslide}{
  textpos={.15\slidewidth,.75\slideheight},
  textwidth=.7\slidewidth,
  titlefont=\bfseries\LARGE\centering,
  textfont=\centering,
  textheight=.67\slideheight,
  clockhook=t,clockpos={.5\slidewidth,.045\slideheight},
  clockalign=1,clockcolor=pdcolor1
}{%
  \psframe*[linewidth=0pt,linecolor=pdcolor2]%
    (0,0)(\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
}
\pddefinetemplate{slide}{
  rfpos={.985\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
  rffont=\tiny,
  iacolor=pdcolor3,
  clockhook=t,clockpos={.5\slidewidth,.045\slideheight},
  clockalign=1,clockcolor=pdcolor1,
  titlewidth=.7\slidewidth,
  titlefont=\bfseries\LARGE\color{pdcolor1}\raggedright,
  textwidth=.9\slidewidth,
  titlepos={.05\slidewidth,.93\slideheight},
  textpos={.05\slidewidth,.87\slideheight},
  textheight=.76\slideheight
}{{%
  \psset{linewidth=0pt}%
  \psframe*[linecolor=pdcolor2](0,0)(\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  \pspolygon*[linecolor=pdcolor1]%
    (0,0)(.1\slidewidth,0)(0,.1\slideheight)
  \pspolygon*[linecolor=pdcolor1](\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
    (.9\slidewidth,\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.9\slideheight)%
}}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{sectionslide}{
  titlehook=t,titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.55\slideheight},
  titlefont=\bfseries\LARGE\color{pdcolor1}\centering
}{}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{wideslide}{}{}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionslide}
\def\labelitemi{\footnotesize\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemii{\small\ding{117}}
\def\labelitemiii{\tiny\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemiv{\tiny\ding{117}}
\pdsetup{
  list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
}
\def\rmdefault{cmss}
%</pdjefka>
%
%<*pdpazik>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
\ProvidesPackage{powerdot-pazik}[2005/12/10 v1.1 pazik style (CE,HA)]
\RequirePackage{pifont}
\RequirePackage{pst-char}
\RequirePackage{pst-grad}
\RequirePackage{type1cm}
\DeclareFixedFont\pd@psmath{OML}{cmm}{m}{it}{2cm}
\DeclareFixedFont\pd@psroman{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{2cm}
\pddefinepalettes{red}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{RGB}{225,187,100}    % gold
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{RGB}{111,24,17}      % brick red
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{RGB}{0,0,0}          % black
  \colorlet{mytoctcolor}{pdcolor1}
  \colorlet{mytochlcolor}{pdcolor2!90}
  \colorlet{mytitlecolor}{pdcolor1}
  \colorlet{myiacolor}{pdcolor1!65!pdcolor3}
  \def\pd@pazik@i{\pd@psmath\char25}
  \def\pd@pazik@ii{\pd@psroman e}
  \def\pd@pazik@iii{\pd@psroman i}
  \def\pd@pazik@iv{\pd@psmath\char16}
}{brown}{
  \definecolor{pdcolor1}{RGB}{22,80,100}      % blue
  \definecolor{pdcolor2}{rgb}{.749,.635,.376} % tan
  \definecolor{pdcolor3}{RGB}{0,0,0}          % black
  \colorlet{mytoctcolor}{pdcolor2}
  \colorlet{mytochlcolor}{pdcolor1}
  \colorlet{mytitlecolor}{pdcolor2}
  \colorlet{myiacolor}{pdcolor1!70}
  \def\pd@pazik@i{\pd@psmath h}
  \def\pd@pazik@ii{\pd@psmath e}
  \def\pd@pazik@iii{\pd@psmath c}
  \def\pd@pazik@iv{\pd@psmath\char11}
}
\pddefinetemplate{titleslide}{
  textpos={.15\slidewidth,.75\slideheight},
  textwidth=.7\slidewidth,
  titlefont=\bfseries\LARGE\centering,
  textfont=\centering,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    textheight=.67\slideheight,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    textheight=.55\slideheight
}{{%
  \psframe*[linestyle=none,linecolor=pdcolor2!90]%
    (0,0)(\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  \psset{linestyle=none,fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2!90,%
    gradend=pdcolor3,gradmidpoint=0,linewidth=0pt}%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe[gradangle=90](0\slidewidth,0\slideheight)%
      (.15\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
    \pd@pazik@lbg
  }{%
    \psframe[gradangle=180](0\slidewidth,0\slideheight)%
      (\slidewidth,.2\slideheight)%
    \pd@pazik@pbg
  }%
}}
\pddefinetemplate{basic}{%
  titlefont=\bfseries\LARGE\color{mytitlecolor}\raggedright,
  rfpos={.98\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
  lffont=\tiny,cffont=\tiny,rffont=\tiny,
  iacolor=myiacolor,
  clockhook=t,
  clockalign=1,
  clockcolor=pdcolor1,
  toctcolor=mytoctcolor,
  tochltcolor=mytoctcolor,
  tochlcolor=mytochlcolor,
  tocfont=\tiny\raggedright,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    textheight=.82\slideheight,
    titlepos={.02\slidewidth,.94\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.96\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=portrait,
    lfpos={.02\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
    cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
    clockpos={.5\slidewidth,.035\slideheight},
    titlepos={.02\slidewidth,.945\slideheight},
    titlewidth=.96\slidewidth,
    textpos={.02\slidewidth,.87\slideheight},
    textwidth=.96\slidewidth,
}{{%
  \psframe*[linestyle=none,linecolor=pdcolor2!90]%
    (0,0)(\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  \psset{linestyle=none,fillstyle=gradient,gradbegin=pdcolor2!90,%
    gradend=pdcolor3,gradmidpoint=0,gradangle=90,linewidth=0pt}%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
     \psframe(.145\slidewidth,\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.9\slideheight)%
     \pd@pazik@lbg
  }{%
     \psframe(0,\slideheight)(\slidewidth,.9\slideheight)%
     \pd@pazik@pbg
  }%
}}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{slide}{
  ifsetup=landscape,
    lfpos={.17\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
    cfpos={.575\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
    clockpos={.07\slidewidth,.045\slideheight},
    textpos={.17\slidewidth,.87\slideheight},
    textwidth=.81\slidewidth,
    tocwidth=.12\slidewidth,
    tocslidesep=.3em,tocslideindent=.2em,
    tocsecm={\psline[linewidth=.2pt,linecolor=pdcolor1]%
      (-.05,-.05)(.12\slidewidth,-.05)},
    tocpos={.015\slidewidth,.86\slideheight},
  ifsetup=portrait,
    textheight=.65\slideheight,tocsecsep=.2em,
    stochook=tr,stocpos={.44\slidewidth,.18\slideheight},
    stocfont=\tiny\raggedleft,
    tocslidesep=.2em,
    ntocpos={.56\slidewidth,.18\slideheight},
    ntocfont=\tiny\raggedright
}{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe*[linestyle=none,linecolor=pdcolor3]%
      (0,0)(.15\slidewidth,\slideheight)%
  }{%
    \psframe*[linestyle=none,linecolor=pdcolor3]%
      (0,0)(\slidewidth,.2\slideheight)%
  }%
}
\pddefinetemplate[basic]{wideslide}{%
  ifsetup=landscape,
    tocpos,textpos={.02\slidewidth,.87\slideheight},
    textwidth=.96\slidewidth,
    lfpos={.02\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
    cfpos={.5\slidewidth,.015\slideheight},
    clockpos={.5\slidewidth,.045\slideheight},
  ifsetup=portrait,
    textheight=.82\slideheight,
}{%
  \pdifsetup{landscape}{%
    \psframe*[linestyle=none,linecolor=pdcolor3]%
      (0,\slideheight)(.15\slidewidth,.9\slideheight)%
  }{}%
}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{sectionslide}{%
  titlehook=c,
  titlefont=\bfseries\LARGE\centering,
  titlewidth=.9\slidewidth,
  ifsetup=landscape,
    titlepos={.585\slidewidth,.6\slideheight},
  ifsetup=portrait,
    titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.6\slideheight}
}{%
}
\pddefinetemplate[wideslide]{sectionwideslide}{%
  titlehook=c,
  titlefont=\bfseries\LARGE\centering,
  titlepos={.5\slidewidth,.6\slideheight},
  titlewidth=.9\slidewidth
}{}
\def\pd@pazik@lbg{%
  \psset{fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=pdcolor2}%
  \rput{-10}(.35\slidewidth,.6\slideheight){\pscharpath{\pd@pazik@i}}%
  \rput{15}(.4\slidewidth,.3\slideheight){\pscharpath{\pd@pazik@ii}}%
  \rput{-20}(.8\slidewidth,.2\slideheight){\pscharpath{\pd@pazik@iii}}%
  \rput{30}(.7\slidewidth,.7\slideheight){\pscharpath{\pd@pazik@iv}}%
}
\def\pd@pazik@pbg{%
  \psset{fillstyle=solid,fillcolor=pdcolor2}%
  \rput{-10}(.23\slidewidth,.78\slideheight){\pscharpath{\pd@pazik@i}}%
  \rput{15}(.35\slidewidth,.4\slideheight){\pscharpath{\pd@pazik@ii}}%
  \rput{-20}(.8\slidewidth,.3\slideheight){\pscharpath{\pd@pazik@iii}}%
  \rput{30}(.7\slidewidth,.7\slideheight){\pscharpath{\pd@pazik@iv}}%
}
\setkeys[pd]{section}{sectemp=sectionslide,widesectemp=sectionwideslide}
\def\labelitemi{\footnotesize\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemii{\small\ding{117}}
\def\labelitemiii{\tiny\ding{110}}
\def\labelitemiv{\tiny\ding{117}}
\pdsetup{
  list={labelsep=1em,leftmargin=*,itemsep=0pt,topsep=5pt,parsep=0pt}
}
\def\rmdefault{cmss}
%</pdpazik>
%
%<*pdstyletest>
%%
%% For testing, enter your style below.
%% Switch on only one paper/orient option at a time.
\documentclass[
  style=your style,
  paper=screen,
%%  paper=a4paper,
%%  paper=letterpaper,
  orient=landscape,
%%  orient=portrait,
  size=11pt,
%%  hlsections,
  clock
]{powerdot}

\pdsetup{
  lf=left footer,
  cf=center footer,
  rf=right footer,
  randomdots,dprop={dotstyle=ocircle}
}

%% For testing text height.
\makeatletter
\def\textheightrule{%
  \raisebox\baselineskip{\rule{1cm}\pd@@textheight}%
}
\makeatother

\title{This is a test file to test new styles with --
this title is very long on purpose.\thanks{Adjust textheight
to position this footnote.}}
\author{Hendri Adriaens \and Christopher Ellison}
\date{August 16, 2005}

\begin{document}

\maketitle

\begin{slide}{Test normal slide}
  Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut purus
  elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur
  dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer
  id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque
  habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac
  turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus sem.

  Notice the color of the equation number!
  \begin{equation}
    (a+b)^n=\sum_{k=0}^n{n\choose k}a^{n-k}b^k
  \end{equation}
\end{slide}

\begin{slide}{Test itemize}
  Some text.\pause
  \begin{itemize}
    \item level 1\pause
    \begin{itemize}
      \item level 2\pause
      \begin{itemize}
        \item level 3\pause
        \begin{itemize}
          \item level 4
        \end{itemize}
      \end{itemize}
    \end{itemize}
  \end{itemize}
  Some text.\footnote{Adjust textheight
  to position this footnote.}
\end{slide}

\section{Normal section}

\begin{slide}{Test enumerate and inactive color}
  Some text.\pause
  \begin{enumerate}[type=1]
    \item level 1\pause
    \begin{enumerate}
      \item level 2\pause
      \begin{enumerate}
        \item level 3\pause
        \begin{enumerate}
          \item level 4
        \end{enumerate}
      \end{enumerate}
    \end{enumerate}
  \end{enumerate}
  Some text.
\end{slide}

\begin{slide}{The rule has height \texttt{textheight}}
  \textheightrule
\end{slide}

\section[template=wideslide]{Wide slide section}

\begin{wideslide}{Test wideslide}
  Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing elit. Ut purus
  elit, vestibulum ut, placerat ac, adipiscing vitae, felis. Curabitur
  dictum gravida mauris. Nam arcu libero, nonummy eget, consectetuer
  id, vulputate a, magna. Donec vehicula augue eu neque. Pellentesque
  habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et malesuada fames ac
  turpis egestas. Mauris ut leo. Cras viverra metus rhoncus
  sem.\footnote{Adjust textheight to position this footnote.}

  Notice the color of the equation number!
  \begin{equation}
    (a+b)^n=\sum_{k=0}^n{n\choose k}a^{n-k}b^k
  \end{equation}
\end{wideslide}

\begin{wideslide}{The rule has height \texttt{textheight}}
  \textheightrule
\end{wideslide}

\end{document}
%</pdstyletest>
%
%<*pdstyleexample>
\documentclass[paper=letterpaper,style=\style]{powerdot}
\title{Example of the \style\ style}
\author{Hendri Adriaens \and Christopher Ellison}
\pddefinetemplate[slide]{slide}{tocpos}{}
\pdsetup{lf=left footer,rf=right footer}
\begin{document}
\maketitle
\begin{slide}{Example slide}
  Here is the binomium formula.
  \begin{equation}\label{binomium}
    (a+b)^n=\sum_{k=0}^n{n\choose k}a^{n-k}b^k
  \end{equation}
  We will prove formula (\ref{binomium}) on the blackboard.\\
  \begin{itemize}
    \item Here
    \begin{itemize}
      \item is
      \begin{itemize}
        \item a
        \begin{itemize}
          \item list
        \end{itemize}
        \item with
      \end{itemize}
      \item seven
    \end{itemize}
    \item items.
  \end{itemize}
\end{slide}
\end{document}
%</pdstyleexample>
%
%<*pdexample1>
\documentclass{powerdot}

\title{powerdot example 1}
\author{Hendri Adriaens \and Christopher Ellison}

\begin{document}

\maketitle

\begin{slide}{Slide 1}
  \begin{itemize}
    \item This is the first slide\pause
    \item There is nothing special about it.
  \end{itemize}
\end{slide}

\section{First section}

\begin{slide}{Slide 2}
  \begin{itemize}
    \item<1-> Here
    \begin{itemize}
      \item<2-> we
      \begin{itemize}
        \item<3-> demonstrate
        \begin{itemize}
          \item<4-> the itemize environment
        \end{itemize}
      \end{itemize}
    \end{itemize}
  \end{itemize}
\end{slide}

\begin{slide}{Slide 3}
  \begin{enumerate}[type=1]
    \item<1> Here
    \begin{enumerate}
      \item<2> we
      \begin{enumerate}
        \item<3> demonstrate
        \begin{enumerate}
          \item<4> the enumerate environment
        \end{enumerate}
      \end{enumerate}
    \end{enumerate}
  \end{enumerate}
\end{slide}

\end{document}
%</pdexample1>
%
%<*pdexample2>
\documentclass[
  size=12pt,
  style=ikeda,
  paper=screen,
%% Try me!
%%  orient=portrait,
%%  mode=handout,
%%  display=slidesnotes,
  pauseslide,
  nohandoutpagebreaks,
  fleqn
]{powerdot}

\title{powerdot example 2}
\author{Hendri Adriaens\and Christopher Ellison}

\pdsetup{
  lf=Example 2,
  rf=for powerdot,
  trans=Wipe,
  theslide=slide~\arabic{slide},
  list={itemsep=6pt}
}

\begin{document}

\maketitle

\begin{slide}{Slide 1}
  \begin{itemize}
    \item This is a bigger example\pause
    \item demonstrating more of the possibilities of powerdot.
  \end{itemize}
\end{slide}

\section{This section has a slide}

\begin{slide}{Slide 2}
  Here is the binomium formula.\pause
  \begin{equation}\label{binomium}
    (a+b)^n=\sum_{k=0}^n{n\choose k}a^{n-k}b^k
  \end{equation}\pause
  We will prove formula (\ref{binomium}) on the blackboard.\\
  Click the title of this slide to switch to the black slide.
\end{slide}

\begin{note}{Note to slide 2}
  Here we could type the proof that
  we want to copy to the blackboard.
\end{note}

\begin{slide}{Slide 3}
  \begin{itemize}[type=1]
    \item This happens\dots\pause
    \item when you change\dots\pause
    \item the type of itemize.
  \end{itemize}
\end{slide}

\section[template=wideslide,tocsection=hidden]{A hidden wide section}

\begin{slide}{Slide 4}
  \begin{itemize}
    \item We only treat this material\dots\pause
    \begin{itemize}
      \item if we have some time left.\pause
      \item But don't hesitate\dots\pause
    \end{itemize}
    \item to read it yourself.
  \end{itemize}
\end{slide}

\begin{wideslide}{Slide 5}
  This wide slide can contain more material
  as it is wider and does not have a table
  of contents.
\end{wideslide}

\end{document}
%</pdexample2>
%
%<*pdexample3>
\documentclass[style=klope,clock,hlsections]{powerdot}

\usepackage{amsmath}
\usepackage{pst-node}
\usepackage{listings}

\lstnewenvironment{example}[1][]{%
  \lstset{basicstyle=\footnotesize\ttfamily,columns=flexible,%
    frame=single,backgroundcolor=\color{yellow!20},%
    xleftmargin=\fboxsep,xrightmargin=\fboxsep,gobble=1%
    }\lstset{#1}}{}
\lstnewenvironment{examplesmall}[1][]{%
  \lstset{basicstyle=\tiny\ttfamily,columns=flexible,%
    frame=single,backgroundcolor=\color{yellow!20},%
    xleftmargin=\fboxsep,xrightmargin=\fboxsep,gobble=2%
    }\lstset{#1}}{}

\title{powerdot example 3 --- verbatim and random dots}
\author{Hendri Adriaens\and Christopher Ellison}

\pdsetup{
  lf=Example 3,
  rf=for powerdot,
  palette=Spring,
  randomdots,
  dprop={dotstyle=ocircle,linewidth=.25pt},
  dmindots=5,dmaxdots=5,
  dminsize=600pt,dmaxsize=700pt,
  dbright=50,
  logohook=c,
  logopos={.505\slidewidth,.08\slideheight},
  logocmd={\includegraphics[scale=.05]{powerdot-default.ps}}
}

\begin{document}

\maketitle

\begin{slide}{Overview}
  \begin{enumerate}[type=1]
    \item This file demonstrates \pause
    \begin{itemize}
      \item some uses of \texttt{verbatim} \pause
    \end{itemize}
    \item and \pause
    \begin{itemize}
      \item some uses of randomdots
    \end{itemize}
  \end{enumerate}
\end{slide}

\section{section}

\begin{slide}[palette=PastelFlower,method=direct,
              dprop={dotstyle=*},
              dminsize=5pt,dmaxsize=10pt,
              dmindots=5,dmaxdots=10]{Name that quote}
  G\"odel, Escher, Bach: an Eternal Golden Braid \pause

  \verb|G\"odel, Escher, Bach: an Eternal Golden Braid| \pause

  \begin{quote}
    The two of you may find it amusing to listen
    to such totally meaningless cacophony, but I assure you it is not at
    all pleasant for a sensitive composer to be subjected to such
    excruciating, empty dissonances and meaningless rhythms.  Achilles,
    I thought you had a good feeling for music. Could it be that your
    previous pieces had merit merely by coincidence?
  \end{quote}
\end{slide}

\begin{slide}[palette=BlueWater,
              dprop={dotstyle=osquare,linewidth=.2pt},
              dminsize=4pt,dmaxsize=10pt,
              dmindots=5,dmaxdots=10]{Itemize}
  \begin{itemize}
    \item<1> here
    \item<2> we
    \item<3> go
  \end{itemize}
\end{slide}

\begin{slide}[toc=What day is it?,bm=What day is it?,method=direct,
              dprop={dotstyle=*},dminsize=4pt,dmaxsize=20pt,
              dmindots=30,dmaxdots=30]{What day is it?\hfill A test}
\begin{example}
  <?php
  if ($day == "monday")
  {
    $callInSick = true;
  }
  else
  {
    $callInSick = false;
  }
  ?>
\end{example}
\end{slide}

\section[slide=false]{The \texttt{direct} and \texttt{file} methods}

\begin{slide}[method=direct,randomdots=false]{Quadratic}
  With \verb|method=direct|, there are no overlays.\pause

  But you can still use display verbatim text.

  \[
    x \pause = \pause \frac{-b \pm \sqrt{b^2 - 4ac}}{2a} \pause
  \]

  Attempting \pause a \pause pause\ldots\pause

  \verb|Plot[3x,{x,0,10}]|
\end{slide}

\begin{slide}[method=file,randomdots=false]{Quadratic}
  With \verb|method=file|, \pause you can display verbatim text and have overlays.\pause

  \[
    x \pause = \pause \frac{-b \pm \sqrt{b^2 - 4ac}}{2a} \pause
  \]

  Attempting \pause a \pause pause\ldots\pause

  \verb|Plot[3x,{x,0,10}]|
\end{slide}

\section[slide=false]{Nodes}

\begin{slide}[method=file,randomdots=false]{Taylor}
\begin{lstlisting}[escapechar=|,mathescape]
 e^x |\pause| = 1 + |\pause|x + |\pause|x^2/2! + |\color{red}{\ldots}| |\pause|
 e^x |\pause| = 1 + |\pause|x + |\pause|$\rnode{A}{\frac{x^2}{2!}}$ +  |\color{red}{\ldots}|
\end{lstlisting}
\pause\vspace{.1in}
Notice, \rnode{B}{this} fraction is in \verb|mathmode|.
\onslide*{11-}{\ncarc[linecolor=blue,arcangle=-5]{->}{B}{A}}\pause \vspace{.1in}

The above (as its own slide) was coded as follows:
\begin{examplesmall}[escapechar=@]
  \begin{slide}[method=file]{Taylor}
    \begin{lstlisting}[escapechar=|,mathescape]
      e^x |\pause| = 1 + |\pause|x + |\pause|x^2/2! + |\color{red}{\ldots}| |\pause|
      e^x |\pause| = 1 + |\pause|x + |\pause|$\rnode{A}{\frac{x^2}{2!}}$ + |\color{red}{\ldots}|
    \end{lstlisting}

    \pause\vspace{.1in}

    Notice, \rnode{B}{this} fraction is in \verb|mathmode|.
    \onslide*{11-}{\ncarc[linecolor=blue,arcangle=-5]{->}{B}{A}}\pause \vspace{.1in}
  @\char`\\@end{slide}
\end{examplesmall}
\end{slide}

\end{document}
%</pdexample3>
%
%<*preamble>
\usepackage{url}
\usepackage{fourier}
\usepackage{xcolor}
\usepackage{enumitem}
\usepackage{graphicx}
\usepackage{pst-char}
\usepackage{listings}
\usepackage{array}
\usepackage{xkeyval}
\usepackage[section]{placeins}
\addtolength\textheight{2cm}
\addtolength\topmargin{-1cm}
\lstnewenvironment{command}{%
  \lstset{columns=flexible,frame=single,backgroundcolor=\color{blue!20},%
    xleftmargin=\fboxsep,xrightmargin=\fboxsep,escapeinside=`',gobble=1}}{}
\lstnewenvironment{example}[1][]{%
  \lstset{basicstyle=\footnotesize\ttfamily,columns=flexible,frame=single,%
    backgroundcolor=\color{yellow!20},xleftmargin=\fboxsep,%
    xrightmargin=\fboxsep,gobble=1,%
%    language=[LaTeX]TeX,keywordstyle=\color{blue},%
%    moretexcs=[1]{color,ProvidesPackage},%
%    moretexcs=[2]{onslide,pause,pdsetup,maketitle,tableofcontents},%
%    texcsstyle=[2]\color{red}%
    }\lstset{#1}}{}
\def\mktitledecor{%
  \rput[tl]{90}(-5.5,-26.51){%
    \psline[linewidth=1pt](0,1.5)(\paperheight,1.5)%
    \rput[lB](.075\paperheight,.5){\pscharpath[linecolor=blue!50,%
      fillcolor=yellow!20,fillstyle=solid,linewidth=.5pt]%
      {\Huge\bfseries\sffamily powerdot}%
    }%
    \rput[rB](.925\paperheight,.5){\pscharpath[linecolor=blue!50,%
      fillcolor=yellow!20,fillstyle=solid,linewidth=.5pt]%
      {\Huge\bfseries Documentation}%
    }%
    \psline[linewidth=1pt](0,0)(\paperheight,0)%
  }%
}
\makeatletter
\def\option#1{%
  \XKV@for@n{#1}\pd@tempa{%
    \fcolorbox{black}{red!20}{\texttt\pd@tempa}\quad
  }%
  \vspace*{.2cm}%
}
\def\tableofcontents{\@starttoc{toc}}
\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
  \section*{Version history}%
  For more information on bug fixes, typeset the source code
  documentation (see section~\ref{sec:source}).\par\medskip
  \GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces
}{}%
\def\DescribeMacros{\leavevmode\@bsphack
  \begingroup\MakePrivateLetters\Describe@Macros}
\def\Describe@Macros#1{\endgroup\strut
  \marginpar{\raggedleft
  \def\@tempa{#1}\count@\z@
  \XKV@for@o\@tempa\@tempa{%
    \ifnum\count@>\z@\\\fi\advance\count@\@ne
    \MacroFont\expandafter\string\@tempa
    \expandafter\SpecialUsageIndex\expandafter{\@tempa}%
  }}%
  \@esphack\ignorespaces
}
\def\DescribeOption#1{\leavevmode\@bsphack
              \marginpar{\raggedleft\PrintDescribeOption{#1}}%
              \SpecialOptionIndex{#1}\@esphack\ignorespaces}
\def\PrintDescribeOption#1{\strut\emph{option}\\\MacroFont #1\ }
\def\SpecialOptionIndex#1{\@bsphack
    \index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}
           (option)\encapchar usage}\@esphack}
\def\DescribeOptions#1{\leavevmode\@bsphack
  \marginpar{\raggedleft\strut\emph{options}%
  \@for\@tempa:=#1\do{%
    \\\strut\MacroFont\@tempa\SpecialOptionIndex\@tempa
  }}\@esphack\ignorespaces}
\def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack
    \index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}
           (environment)\encapchar usage}\@esphack}
\def\changes@#1#2#3{%
  \protected@edef\@tempa{%
    \noexpand\glossary{\textbf{#1}\hfill\emph{(#2)}%
    \levelchar
    \ifx\saved@macroname\@empty
      \space\actualchar\generalname
    \else
      \expandafter\@gobble\saved@macroname
      \actualchar\string\verb\quotechar*%
      \verbatimchar\saved@macroname\verbatimchar
    \fi
    :\levelchar #3}%
  }%
  \@tempa\endgroup\@esphack
}
\makeatother
\def\PrintChangesX{%
  \begingroup
    \let\efill\relax
    \PrintChanges
  \endgroup
}
\def\PrintIndexX{%
  \begingroup
    \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
    \setlength{\columnsep}{18pt}%
    \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}%
    \PrintIndex
  \endgroup
}
\def\larg#1{{\ttfamily\char`\<}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\>}}
\def\LyX{L\kern-.1667em\lower.25em\hbox{Y}\kern-.125emX\@}
\def\LyXarrow{\leavevmode\,$\triangleright$\,\allowbreak}
\let\pf\textsf
\def\equals{=}
\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
\newcolumntype{d}{c|l}
\newcolumntype{e}{c|c|c|c}
\newcolumntype{f}{l|p{8cm}}
\RecordChanges
\CodelineIndex
\newcounter{FAQ}
\def\question{%
  \stepcounter{FAQ}%
  \parskip4pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
  \itemsep4pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
  \parsep4pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
  \item[\textbf{Q\arabic{FAQ}}]%
}
\def\answer{%
  \parskip0pt
  \itemsep0pt
  \parsep0pt
  \item[\textbf{A\arabic{FAQ}}]%
}
\def\styleexample#1{%
  \IfFileExists{powerdot-styleexample-#1.001}{%
    \IfFileExists{powerdot-styleexample-#1.002}{%
      \hspace*{\stretch{1}}%
      \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=.16,angle=-90,clip]%
        {powerdot-styleexample-#1.001}}%
      \hspace*{\stretch{2}}%
      \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=.16,angle=-90,clip]%
        {powerdot-styleexample-#1.002}}%
      \hspace*{\stretch{1}}\par
    }{\textbf{No example files found for style \pf{#1}.}}%
  }{\textbf{No example files found for style \pf{#1}.}}%
}
%</preamble>
%
%<*bib>
@book{companion,
  author       = {Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens},
  title        = {The {\LaTeX} Companion},
  edition      = 2,
  note         = {With Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, and Chris Rowley},
  series       = {Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting},
  publisher    = {Addison-Wesley},
  address      = {Boston, Massachusetts},
  year         = 2004,
  pagenums     = {1120},
  bibliography = {yes},
  index        = {yes},
  isbn         = {0-201-36299-6}
}

@MISC{PSTricks,
  author       = {{Timothy Van} {Zandt et al.}},
  title        = {\pf{PSTricks} package, v1.07, 2005/05/06},
  howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/graphics/pstricks}}
}

@MISC{PSTricksWeb,
  author       = {Herbert Vo\ss},
  title        = {\pf{PSTricks} website},
  howpublished = {\url{http://pstricks.tug.org}}
}

@MISC{xkeyval,
  author       = {Hendri Adriaens},
  title        = {\pf{xkeyval} package},
  howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/xkeyval}}
}

@MISC{extsizes,
  author       = {James Kilfiger and Wolfgang May},
  title        = {\pf{extsizes} bundle},
  howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/extsizes}}
}

@MISC{prosper,
  author       = {Fr\'ed\'eric Goualard and Peter M\o ller Neergaard},
  title        = {\pf{prosper} class},
  howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/prosper}}
}

@MISC{HA-prosper,
  author       = {Hendri Adriaens},
  title        = {\pf{HA-prosper} package},
  howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/HA-prosper}}
}

@MISC{enumitem,
  author       = {Javier Bezos},
  title        = {\pf{enumitem} package},
  howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem}}
}

@MISC{hyperref,
  author       = {Sebastian Rahtz and Heiko Overdiek},
  title        = {\pf{hyperref} package},
  howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref}}
}

@MISC{natbib,
  author       = {Patrick W. Daly},
  title        = {\pf{natbib} package},
  howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/natbib}}
}

@MISC{geometry,
  author       = {Hideo Umeki},
  title        = {\pf{geometry} package},
  howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/geometry}}
}

@MISC{xcolor,
  author       = {Uwe Kern},
  title        = {\pf{xcolor} package},
  howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/xcolor}}
}

@MISC{graphics,
  author       = {David Carlisle},
  title        = {\pf{graphics} bundle},
  howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/latex/required/graphics}}
}

@MISC{random,
  author       = {Donald Arseneau},
  title        = {\texttt{random.tex}},
  howpublished = {\url{CTAN:/macros/generic/misc}}
}

@MISC{CTAN,
  author       = {CTAN crew},
  title        = {{The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network}},
  howpublished = {\url{http://www.ctan.org}}
}

@MISC{LyXWeb,
  author       = {{\LyX\ crew}},
  title        = {{\LyX\ website}},
  howpublished = {\url{http://www.lyx.org}}
}

@MISC{javascript,
  author       = {Adobe Solutions Network},
  title        = {{Acrobat JavaScript Scripting Reference}},
  howpublished = {\url{http://partners.adobe.com/public/developer/en/acrobat/sdk/pdf/javascript/AcroJS.pdf}}
}
%</bib>
